Multi-Channel Measuring and Control System DULCOMARIN® II

Transcription

Multi-Channel Measuring and Control System DULCOMARIN® II
Complete operating instructions
Multi-Channel Measuring and Control System
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and
Disinfection Controller DXCa
A0204
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXCa _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
986880
BA DC 078 04/12 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986880, 2, en_GB
© 2012
2
Supplemental instructions
General non-discriminatory approach
In order to make it easier to read, this document uses the male
form in grammatical structures but with an implied neutral sense. It
is aimed equally at both men and women. We kindly ask female
readers for their understanding in this simplification of the text.
Supplementary information
Read the following supplementary information in its entirety!
The following are highlighted separately in the document:
n Enumerated lists
Instructions
ð Results of the instructions
Information
This provides important information relating to the cor‐
rect operation of the system or is intended to make
your work easier.
Safety information
Safety information are provided with detailed descriptions of the
endangering situation, see Ä Chapter 2.1 ‘Explanation of the
safety information’ on page 15
3
Overall Table of Contents
Overall Table of Contents
4
EN
Multi-Channel Measuring and Control System DULCO‐
MARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disinfection
Controller DXCa ................................................................... 8
1 Device identification / identity code................................ 12
2 Introduction.................................................................... 15
2.1 Explanation of the safety information.......................... 15
2.2 Users' qualifications.................................................... 16
3 Safety and responsibility................................................ 18
3.1 General safety information.......................................... 18
3.2 Correct and proper use............................................... 18
4 Planning aids and requirements for the installation
site ................................................................................ 20
4.1 Requirements for the installation site.......................... 20
4.2 Determine the requirement for cables and accesso‐
ries.............................................................................. 21
4.3 Allocate power supply modules (DULCOMARIN® II
DULCO-Net)............................................................... 25
4.4 Routing the CAN bus backbone................................. 26
5 Assembly and installation.............................................. 27
5.1 Procedure with DXC housing (large).......................... 27
5.2 Procedure with DXM housing (small)......................... 34
5.3 install the CAN bus cable............................................ 37
6 Device overview and operating elements...................... 43
7 Functional description (general).................................... 45
8 Maintenance, repairs and disposal................................ 48
8.1 Disposal of used parts................................................ 49
9 Technical data spare parts and accessories................. 50
10 EC Declaration of Conformity and fulfilled standards. . 51
11 Wiring diagram DULCOMARIN® II compact ............... 52
EN
Multi-Channel Measuring and Control System DULCO‐
MARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disinfection
Controller DXCa .................................................................
1 Further applicable documents.......................................
2 Introduction....................................................................
2.1 Explanation of the safety information..........................
2.2 Users' qualifications....................................................
3 Safety and responsibility................................................
3.1 General Safety Information.........................................
3.2 Correct and Proper Use .............................................
4 Functional description....................................................
5 Control elements ...........................................................
5.1 Function of the buttons...............................................
5.2 Access code (password).............................................
6 Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules.............
6.1 Logging modules on and off.......................................
6.2 Commissioning CAN-Beta pump................................
6.3 Commissioning R module...........................................
7 Structure of the of the operating menu..........................
7.1 Structural principle......................................................
7.2 Permanent display......................................................
7.3 Central menu item......................................................
57
61
62
62
63
65
65
66
67
68
68
70
72
72
74
77
79
79
80
81
Overall Table of Contents
7.4 Log off SD card safely................................................ 82
7.5 Generally applicable states......................................... 83
7.6 Menus underneath the central menu item.................. 85
7.7 Submenus of the parametric assignment menu......... 87
8 Calibration...................................................................... 88
8.1 Calibration of pH measured variable.......................... 89
8.2 Redox measured variable........................................... 93
8.3 Calibrate measured variable "chlorine free"............... 94
8.4 Calibrate measured variable "Total chlorine".............. 99
8.5 Calibrate measured variable for fluoride (F-)............ 105
8.6 Calibrate measured variable for chlorine dioxide
(CIO2)........................................................................ 107
8.7 Calibrate measured variable hydrogen peroxide
(H2O2)....................................................................... 111
8.8 Measured variable chlorite (CIO2 -)........................... 114
8.9 Calibrate measured variable for peracetic acid
(PES)........................................................................
8.10 Calibration measured variable temperature............
9 Assign parameters.......................................................
9.1 All parameters...........................................................
9.2 Measurement............................................................
9.3 Control......................................................................
9.4 Set mA output...........................................................
9.5 Alarm settings...........................................................
9.6 Parametric assignment flow meter...........................
9.7 Setting Eco!Mode.....................................................
9.8 Chlorine dosing redox dependent.............................
10 Configure...................................................................
10.1 Configuring module DXMaM...................................
10.2 Configuring module DXMaA...................................
10.3 Configuring module DXMaP...................................
10.4 Configuration for free chlorine module....................
10.5 Configuration for total chlorine module...................
10.6 Configuration for chlorine module...........................
10.7 Configuration of R module (control module for
chlorine gas metering device) ................................
10.8 Configuration for P1 module (metering pump
module) ..................................................................
10.9 G module (limit value module) configuration..........
10.10 I module (current input module) configuration .....
11 Maintenance .............................................................
11.1 Configure maintenance timer..................................
12 Troubleshooting.........................................................
EN
DULCOMARIN® II, Screen Plotter Operation...................
1 About this product........................................................
1.1 Storage and transport...............................................
2 Setting up the screen plotter........................................
3 Layout and function of the screen plotter.....................
4 Using an SD card.........................................................
5 Troubleshooting...........................................................
6 Technical data and accessories..................................
117
119
120
120
120
127
141
142
144
145
146
148
149
156
162
164
165
166
167
168
170
171
175
175
177
193
198
198
199
201
203
206
207
5
Overall Table of Contents
6
EN
DULCOMARIN® II, A-Module (Control Module, Pump and
Standard Signal Outputs mA) DXMaA..............................
1 Identity code................................................................
2 About this device.........................................................
2.1 Safety chapter...........................................................
2.2 Storage and transport...............................................
3 Assembly and installation............................................
4 Technical data.............................................................
EN
DULCOMARIN® II, G-Module (Limit Value and Alarm Gen‐
erator Module DXMaG)..................................................... 221
1 Identity code................................................................ 226
2 About this device......................................................... 227
2.1 Safety chapter........................................................... 227
2.2 Storage and transport............................................... 227
3 Assembly and installation............................................ 228
4 Technical data............................................................. 230
EN
DULCOMARIN® II, I-Module (Current Input Module,
Standard Signal Inputs mA) DXMaI..................................
1 Identity code................................................................
2 About this device.........................................................
2.1 Safety chapter...........................................................
2.2 Storage and transport...............................................
3 Assembly and installation............................................
4 Technical data.............................................................
231
236
238
238
238
239
241
EN
DULCOMARIN® II, M-Module DXMaM (Measurement
Module for pH, Redox, Temperature)...............................
1 Identity code................................................................
2 Safety and responsibility..............................................
3 Handling the device.....................................................
4 Terminal Wiring Diagram.............................................
5 Control elements..........................................................
5.1 Layout of the operating menu...................................
6 Adjustment...................................................................
6.1 Basic settings............................................................
6.2 Calibration.................................................................
243
248
250
251
252
255
256
259
259
260
EN
DULCOMARIN® II, N-Module (Power Supply Module
without Relay) DXMaN......................................................
1 Identity code................................................................
2 About this device.........................................................
2.1 Safety chapter...........................................................
2.2 Storage and transport...............................................
3 Assembly and installation............................................
3.1 Repairs (fuse change only).......................................
269
274
276
276
276
277
279
EN
DULCOMARIN® II, P-Module (Power Supply Module with
Relay) DXMaP..................................................................
1 Identity code................................................................
2 About this device.........................................................
2.1 Safety chapter...........................................................
2.2 Storage and transport...............................................
3 Assembly and installation............................................
3.1 Repairs (fuse change only).......................................
281
286
288
288
288
289
291
209
214
216
216
216
217
220
Overall Table of Contents
3.2 Arrangement of LEDs............................................... 292
3.3 Example for connection of a solenoid valve............. 293
4 Technical data............................................................. 294
EN
DULCOMARIN® II, R-Module (Control Unit for Chlorine
Gas Metering Device) DXMaR..........................................
1 Identity code................................................................
2 Safety and responsibility..............................................
3 Handling the device.....................................................
4 Terminal Wiring Diagram.............................................
EN
DULCOMARIN® II Function extension with M, A and P
module..............................................................................
1 Function MAP..............................................................
2 Circulation quantity allocation......................................
2.1 Specification of the respective circulating operating
conditions..................................................................
3 Flow control [water flow] .............................................
4 Timer settings..............................................................
5 Water top-up................................................................
6 Control of the backwashing valves..............................
295
298
300
301
302
305
310
311
313
314
317
319
320
7
Assembly instructions
Multi-Channel Measuring and Control System
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and
Disinfection Controller DXCa
Part 1: Assembly and installation
A0507
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXCa _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 986907
BA DC 080 04/12 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986907, 2, en_GB
© 2012
9
Supplemental instructions
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II , Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 2: Operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, Screen plotter
operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, M-Module
(measuring module for pH, redox [ORP], temperature) DXMaM
connection
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, A-Module (con‐
trol module, pump and standard signal outputs mA) DXMaA
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, N-Module
(power supply module without relay) DXMaN
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, P-Module
(power supply module with relay) DXMaP
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, I-Module (cur‐
rent input module, standard signal inputs mA) DXMal
10
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Device identification / identity code..................................... 12
2
Introduction......................................................................... 15
2.1 Explanation of the safety information.......................... 15
2.2 Users' qualifications.................................................... 16
3
Safety and responsibility..................................................... 18
3.1 General safety information.......................................... 18
3.2 Correct and proper use............................................... 18
4
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site .....
4.1 Requirements for the installation site..........................
4.2 Determine the requirement for cables and accesso‐
ries..............................................................................
4.3 Allocate power supply modules (DULCOMARIN® II
DULCO-Net)...............................................................
4.4 Routing the CAN bus backbone.................................
21
5
Assembly and installation...................................................
5.1 Procedure with DXC housing (large)..........................
5.1.1 Wall mounting..........................................................
5.1.2 Control panel mounting............................................
5.1.3 Installation (electrical)..............................................
5.1.4 Connect the coaxial cable........................................
5.1.5 Connecting the terminals.........................................
5.2 Procedure with DXM housing (small).........................
5.2.1 Mounting (mechanical)............................................
5.2.2 Installation (electrical)..............................................
5.3 install the CAN bus cable............................................
5.3.1 Connections outside the housing.............................
5.3.2 Connections inside the DXC housing......................
27
27
27
29
30
33
33
34
34
35
37
38
41
6
Device overview and operating elements........................... 43
7
Functional description (general).......................................... 45
8
Maintenance, repairs and disposal..................................... 48
8.1 Disposal of used parts................................................ 49
9
Technical data spare parts and accessories....................... 50
10
EC Declaration of Conformity and fulfilled standards......... 51
11
Wiring diagram DULCOMARIN® II compact ...................... 52
12
Index................................................................................... 56
20
20
25
26
11
Device identification / identity code
1
Device identification / identity code
The identity code describes the DULCOMARIN® II,
compact controller
1) The supplied cable is for connection to a hub, switch,
router or an intranet.
For direct connection of the DULCOMARIN® II to a PC/
MAC, the supplied LAN coupling and category 5 crossover cable are required.
The maximum LAN cable length is approximately 100
m.
To operate the web server on a PC we recommend
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5 or higher as the
browser.
The scope of supply of the DXCa includes:
–
–
–
–
–
DXCa
Multi-channel measuring and control system - DULCOMARIN®
1 T-coupler
1 CAN connection cable
1 terminating resistance coupling and 1 terminating
resistance plug
1 SD memory card 64 MB or greater
1 card reader suitable for PCs
II Series DXC
Mounting type:
W
Wall mounted (IP 65)
S
Control cabinet (IP 54)
Version:
0
With operating elements
D
With operating elements for use in drinking water/disinfection applications
Communication interfaces:
0
none
5
Embedded Web-Server, LAN incl. 5 m LAN patch cable 1:1, LAN coupling,
5 m cross-over cable 1)
6
OPC-Server + Embedded Web-Server, LAN incl. 5 m LAN patch cable 1:1,
LAN coupling, 5 m cross-over cable 1)
Option:
1
Screen plotter with data logger incl. SD card and USB card reader
for PC
Module 1:
M
M module, measuring module pH, redox, temperature
I
I module, current input module, 3x mA, 0/4 ... 20 mA
Module 2:
12
0
not occupied
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog out‐
puts
Device identification / identity code
DXCa
Multi-channel measuring and control system - DULCOMARIN®
I
II Series DXC
I module, current input module, 3x mA, 0/4 ... 20 mA
Application:
S
Swimming Pools
D
Disinfection, general
Preset language:
DE
German
EN
English
ES
Spanish
FR
French
IT
Italian
PL
Polish
Certification:
01
CE mark
The identity code describes the complete DULCO‐
MARIN® II DULCO® Net Central Unit.
If the central unit is populated with modules, then the
following applies:
Module 1 preferably as M module
Module 2 preferably allocated to the A module.
Module 3 must always be allocated to the P or N
module.
DXCa
Multi-channel measuring and control system - DULCOMARIN®
1)
Module 1 preferably as M module
2)
only in version: "2" without controls
II Series DXC
Mounting type:
W Wall mounted (IP 65)
S Control cabinet (IP 54)
Version:
0
With operating elements
2
Without operating elements
Communication interfaces:
0
none
5
Embedded Web-Server, LAN incl. 5 m LAN patch cable 1:1, LAN-coupling, 5 m
cross-over-cable 1)
6
OPC-Server + Embedded Web-Server, LAN incl. 5 m LAN patch cable 1:1, LANcoupling, 5 m cross-over-cable 1)
13
Device identification / identity code
DXCa
Multi-channel measuring and control system - DULCOMARIN®
II Series DXC
Option:
0
Without screen plotter 2)
1
Screen plotter with data logger incl. SD card and USB card reader for PC
Module 1:
0
not occupied
M
M module, measuring module pH, redox, temperature
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog outputs
I
I module, current input module, 3x mA, 0/4 ... 20 mA
Module 2:
0
not occupied
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog outputs
M
M module, measuring module: pH, redox, temperature
I
I module, current input module, 3x mA, 0/4 ... 20 mA
Module 3:
0
not occupied
P
P module, power supply, 1 alarm relay, 3 solenoid
valve relays
N
N module, power supply without relay
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog out‐
puts
M
M module, measuring module: pH, redox, temperature
Application:
S
Swimming Pools
D
Disinfection, general
Preset language:
DE
German
EN
English
ES
Spanish
FR
French
IT
Italian
PL
Polish
Certification:
01
14
CE mark
Introduction
2
Introduction
The operating instructions describe the technical data and func‐
tions of the multi-channel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disinfection Con‐
troller DXCa. The operating instructions subsequently refer to the
system merely as DXCa.
2.1 Explanation of the safety information
Introduction
These operating instructions provide information on the technical
data and functions of the product. These operating instructions pro‐
vide detailed safety information and are provided as clear step-bystep instructions.
The safety information and notes are categorised according to the
following scheme. A number of different symbols are used to
denote different situations. The symbols shown here serve only as
examples.
DANGER!
Nature and source of the danger
Consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries.
Measure to be taken to avoid this danger
Danger!
–
Denotes an immediate threatening danger. If this is
disregarded, it will result in fatal or very serious
injuries.
WARNING!
Nature and source of the danger
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries.
Measure to be taken to avoid this danger
Warning!
–
Denotes a possibly hazardous situation. If this is
disregarded, it could result in fatal or very serious
injuries.
CAUTION!
Nature and source of the danger
Possible consequence: Slight or minor injuries, mate‐
rial damage.
Measure to be taken to avoid this danger
Caution!
–
Denotes a possibly hazardous situation. If this is
disregarded, it could result in slight or minor inju‐
ries. May also be used as a warning about material
damage.
15
Introduction
NOTICE!
Nature and source of the danger
Damage to the product or its surroundings
Measure to be taken to avoid this danger
Note!
–
Denotes a possibly damaging situation. If this is
disregarded, the product or an object in its vicinity
could be damaged.
Type of information
Hints on use and additional information
Source of the information, additional measures
Information!
–
Denotes hints on use and other useful information.
It does not indicate a hazardous or damaging sit‐
uation.
2.2 Users' qualifications
WARNING!
Danger of injury with inadequately qualified personnel!
The operator of the plant / device is responsible for
ensuring that the qualifications are fulfilled.
If inadequately qualified personnel work on the unit or
loiter in the hazard zone of the unit, this could result in
dangers that could cause serious injuries and material
damage.
–
–
All work on the unit should therefore only be con‐
ducted by qualified personnel.
Unqualified personnel should be kept away from
the hazard zone
Training
Definition
Instructed personnel
An instructed person is deemed to be a person who has been instructed and,
if required, trained in the tasks assigned to him/her and possible dangers that
could result from improper behaviour, as well as having been instructed in the
required protective equipment and protective measures.
Trained user
A trained user is a person who fulfils the requirements made of an instructed
person and who has also received additional training specific to the system
from ProMinent or another authorised distribution partner.
Trained qualified per‐
sonnel
A qualified employee is deemed to be a person who is able to assess the
tasks assigned to him and recognize possible hazards based on his/her
training, knowledge and experience, as well as knowledge of pertinent regula‐
tions. The assessment of a person's technical training can also be based on
several years of work in the relevant field.
16
Introduction
Training
Definition
Electrician
Electricians are deemed to be people, who are able to complete work on elec‐
trical systems and recognize and avoid possible hazards independently based
on his/her technical training and experience, as well as knowledge of pertinent
standards and regulations.
Electricians should be specifically trained for the working environment in
which the are employed and know the relevant standards and regulations.
Electricians must comply with the provisions of the applicable statutory direc‐
tives on accident prevention.
Customer Service depart‐
ment
Customer Service department refers to service technicians, who have
received proven training and have been authorised by ProMinent to work on
the system.
Note for the system operator
The pertinent accident prevention regulations, as well
as all other generally acknowledged safety regulations,
must be adhered to!
17
Safety and responsibility
3
Safety and responsibility
3.1 General safety information
WARNING!
Unexpected start-up
The DULCOMARIN® II has no on/off switch. It starts
working as soon as voltage is supplied to the mains
cable.
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries
–
–
Measure: Ensure that there can be no unauthor‐
ised access to the device
Match your actions to this particular feature
– Only connect the device to the mains if all pre‐
paratory tasks have been completed and the
device can be placed in service without any
danger
WARNING!
Possibility of overdosing of feed chemicals
Prevent overdosing of feed chemicals in the event of
sensor failure or removal.
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries
–
Measure: Configure your processes so that uncon‐
trolled dosing during sensor selection or malfunc‐
tion is not possible
WARNING!
Maintenance of the degree of protection
Screw the transparent interface cover in place over the
LEDs so that leak-tightness is recreated, if it has been
opened.
Otherwise the IP 65 rating is not achieved.
CAUTION!
Only use the devices which are described in these
operating instructions with CANopen third party
devices which are certified.
3.2 Correct and proper use
NOTICE!
Compensation for control deviations
Damage to the product or its surroundings
–
18
The controller can be used in processes, which
require compensation of > 30 seconds
Safety and responsibility
NOTICE!
Correct and proper use
The unit is intended to measure and regulate liquid
media. The marking of the measured variables is
located on the controller and is absolutely binding.
The unit may only be used in accordance with the
technical details and specifications provided in this
operating manual and in the operating manuals for the
individual components (such as, for example, sensors,
fittings, calibration devices, metering pumps etc.).
Any other uses or modifications are prohibited.
19
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site
4
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site
Ambient conditions
CAUTION!
Protect the module against moisture and the effects of
chemicals, even while still packaged.
The DULCOMARIN® II is resistant to the normal
atmospheres in plant rooms
Store and transport the module it its original packaging.
Ambient conditions for storage and transportation:
n Temperature: -10 °C ... 70 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
Ambient conditions for operation:
n Temperature: 0 °C ... 50 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
4.1 Requirements for the installation site
n
n
n
n
20
Do not position the DULCOMARIN® II outside
Protect the DULCOMARIN® II against sun and frost
Secure the DULCOMARIN® II against unauthorized access
A mains connection is necessary
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site
4.2 Determine the requirement for cables and accessories
Fig. 1: A typical complete measuring point could appear as shown:
Item.
Quantity
Description
Part no.
1
3
T-coupler M12 5-pole CAN
1022155
2
1
M module DXMa M W 0 S DE 01
3
4
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole, 0.5 m
1022137
4
1
Chlorine sensor CLE 3.1-CAN-10 ppm
1023426
5
1
Chlorine sensor CTE 1 CAN-10 ppm
1023427
6
1
Redox sensor RHES-Pt-SE
150703
7
1
pH sensor PHES 112 SE
150702
Coaxial cable 2 m - SN6 - pre-assembled
1024106
8
9
2
Control lead 2 x 0.25 mm2
725122
10
2
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole, 0.5 m
1022137
-
1
In-line probe housing DGMa 3 2 2 T 0 0 0
The central unit and each external module includes enclosed accessories.
21
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site
Fig. 2: Central unit DXCa
Accessories, supplied
Item.
Quantity
Description
Part no.
1
1
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole, 0.5 m
1022137
2
1
T-coupler, M12,5-pole CAN
1022155
-
1
Terminating resistance M12 socket [male ]
1022154
-
1
Terminating resistance M 12 plug [female]
1022592
22
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site
A0487
Fig. 3: External modules DXMa
Accessories, supplied
Item.
Quantity
Description
Part no.
1
1
T-coupler, M12,5-pole CAN
1022155
2
1
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole 0.5 m
1022137
23
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site
Fig. 4: Beta/4 CANopen
Accessories, supplied
Item.
Quantity
Description
Part no.
1
1
T-coupler, M12,5-pole CAN
1022155
2
1
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole 1 m
1022139
Fig. 5: Sensors DXUa
Accessories, supplied
Item.
Quantity
Description
Part no.
1
1
T-coupler, M12,5-pole CAN
1022155
2
1
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole 0.5 m
1022137
24
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site
1.
Determine the requirement for power supply modules, see
2.
Determine the requirement for connection cables between
the external modules
3.
Determine the requirement for holding clamps for the con‐
nection cables (ASV pipe clips, 16 mm, order no. 359904
Ä Chapter 4.3 ‘Allocate power supply modules (DULCO‐
MARIN® II DULCO-Net)’ on page 25
4.3 Allocate power supply modules (DULCOMARIN® II DULCO-Net)
Determine the number of additionally required power supply mod‐
ules (N modules and P modules).
1.
Ensure that for each power supply module there is a power
outlet
The distance between the power supply modules
should not exceed 50 m.
2.
Distribute the power supply modules as uniformly as possible
over the CAN bus line.
3.
With an A module with connected plotters: arrange one of the
power supply modules as close as possible to the A module
Locate the power supply module in
the CAN bus backbone (main line)
(DULCOMARIN® II DULCO-Net)
The central unit always contains a power supply module.
Number of pools
Additional N- or P-mod‐
ules
Number of pools
Additional N- or P-mod‐
ules
1
-
9
4
2
-
10
5
3
1
11
5
4
2
12
6
5
2
13
6
6
3
14
7
7
3
15
7
8
4
16
8
Divide the number of pools by ‘2’ . If a remainder is obtained, round down: (Exception: number of pools =
2)
25
Planning aids and requirements for the installation site
4.4 Routing the CAN bus backbone
CAUTION!
Maximum backbone length
Possible consequence: Malfunctions.
–
The maximum backbone length (without branching
cables) must be less than 400 m
CAUTION!
Maximum length of branching cables
Possible consequence: Malfunctions.
The T-pieces and connecting cables (branching
cables) enclosed with the modules (M-, A-, G-, N-, R-,
I- modules, CAN sensors and metering pumps with
CAN bus must be used.
Branching cables are the connections branching from
the CAN bus backbone to the modules.
The external modules can be placed in any sequence
along the CAN bus backbone. The operating instruc‐
tions show for example possible sequences of the
external modules.
Each CAN cable has a plug or coupling on each end
so that these can be coupled together in sequence to
create longer cables.
Rule
Arrange the external modules in groups for each pool.
First assemble and install the external modules and
their attachments. Only then should you connect the
external modules with the CAN bus backbone and with
each other via the the shortest route.
26
Description
Part no.
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole, 0.5 m
1022137
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole, 1 m
1022139
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole, 2 m
1022140
Connecting cable - CAN, M12, 5 pole, 5 m
1022141
Connecting cable - CAN sold by the metre
1022160
Assembly and installation
5
Assembly and installation
5.1 Procedure with DXC housing (large)
The DXC housing is suitable for mounting on a wall or in a control
panel
5.1.1 Wall mounting
Mounting materials (contained in the scope of delivery)
n
n
n
n
Wall mounting
1 x wall bracket
4 x PT screws 5 x 35 mm
4 x washers 5.3
4 x rawl plug Ø 8 mm, plastic
Take the wall bracket out of the DXC housing
A0490
Fig. 6: Removing the wall bracket
1.
Pull the two snap hooks (1) outwards
ð The wall brackets snaps slightly downwards.
2.
Push the wall bracket downwards (2) from the DXC housing
and fold (3) it out
3.
Use the wall bracket as a drilling template to mark the posi‐
tions of four drill holes
4.
Drill the holes: Ø 8 mm, d = 50 mm
27
Assembly and installation
A0491
Fig. 7: Fitting the wall bracket
5.
Screw the wall bracket into position using the washers, see
Fig. 7
A0492
Fig. 8: Fitting the wall bracket
28
6.
Hook the bottom of the DXC housing (1) into the wall bracket
7.
Lightly press the DXC housing at the top (2) against the wall
bracket
8.
Then check that the DXC housing is hooked in at the top and
press down (3) until it audibly engages
Assembly and installation
5.1.2 Control panel mounting
CAUTION!
Thickness of the control panel
The control panel must be sufficiently thick to ensure
that after fitting it does not bend. With steel panels it
must be at least 2 mm thick; select plastic correspond‐
ingly thicker.
Only in this way can the IP 54 rating be attained.
When fitted, the DXC housing extends approx. 45 mm
from the control panel. A drilling template is enclosed.
A0493
Fig. 9: Control panel mounting
1.
Establish the exact position of the DXC housing using the
drilling template on the control panel and secure it
2.
Mark the holes for the attachment screws using a centre
punch and the drilling holes for the cut-out using the drilling
template
3.
Drill four securing holes using a 5 mm Ø drill bit
CAUTION!
Take care not to cut yourself on the resulting edges.
4.
Either punch the cut-out out or drill four inner holes using a 5
mm Ø drill bit and then cut the cut-out using a jigsaw
5.
De-burr the resulting edges
6.
Undo the four housing screws
7.
Lift the front part out and disconnect the P module ribbon
cable
29
Assembly and installation
8.
Remove the front part
9.
Now break out the necessary threaded holes of the lower
series, see Ä Chapter 5.1.3 ‘Installation (electrical)’
on page 30
10.
Screw the back part to the control panel (using the supplied
PT screws)
11.
Plug the ribbon cable back on
12.
Move the front part into the ‘park position’
ð Now first electrically install the DULCOMARIN® II and
then complete the control panel mounting.
13.
Place the front part on the rear part of the DXC housing and
screw it in
14.
CAUTION!
Protection class IP 54
Once again check the seating of the seal. Pro‐
tection class IP 54 is only achieved if the control
panel mounting is correct.
5.1.3 Installation (electrical)
WARNING!
Failure of the circulating pumps
In the event that the circulating pump fails, it is not suf‐
ficient to use the sample water limit contact of the inline probe housing on its own in order to stop the con‐
trol for the corresponding pool (contact K1 of the M
module).
The pool controller must also be set to Pause using
the contact K2 ‘Pause control ’ of the M module.
Suitable triggers are:
–
–
–
the zero volt contact of the filter control
the zero volt contact of the circulation pump's
motor protection switch
a flow monitor in the circulation line
WARNING!
Safe operating status
Both hardware and software safety precautions must
be taken to ensure that the DULCOMARIN® II adopts a
safe operating status in the event of a fault. E.g. use
limit switches, mechanical locks, ...
During installation the device must not be electrically
live.
The installation must only be carried out by technically
trained personnel.
Observe the technical data in these instructions.
30
Assembly and installation
NOTICE!
Cable strain relief
With control panel mounting, the cables must be
routed in a site-provided cable duct to ensure strain
relief.
1.
Plan which threaded holes shall be broken out (mark the
desired threaded holes)
CAUTION!
When breaking open the threaded holes, avoid
pushing the screwdriver deep into the housing. Parts
inside the device could be damaged.
A0494
Fig. 10: Breaking out threaded holes
2.
To break out the threaded holes, punch the slit in the middle
of the threaded holes using a screwdriver (tip width 3.5 - 4
mm, see Fig. 10) and lever the material out
3.
De-burr the resulting edges
31
Assembly and installation
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
A0495
Fig. 11: Fitting the threaded cable glands
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4.
Screw in the appropriate threaded cable glands (4) using
suitable lock nuts (5) and tighten firmly
5.
Insert multiple seal inserts (3) depending on the cable diam‐
eter being used
6.
Guide the cables into the threaded cable glands
7.
Further steps are contained in Ä Chapter 5.1.4 ‘Connect the
coaxial cable’ on page 33 and Ä Chapter 5.1.5 ‘Connecting
the terminals’ on page 33.
8.
Tighten the union nuts (2) of the threaded cable glands so
that they are properly sealed
9.
Place the front part on the rear part
10.
Manually tighten the four housing screws
11.
32
Blanking plug
Union nut
Multiple seal insert
Threaded cable gland
Lock nut
CAUTION!
Protection class IP 54
Once again check the seating of the seal. Pro‐
tection class IP 54 is only achieved if the control
panel mounting is correct.
Assembly and installation
5.1.4 Connect the coaxial cable
The pH or redox sensor is connected
using a coaxial cable
A0496
Fig. 12: Removing the cable insulation
1.
Uncover the cable shielding according to Fig. 12
2.
Tightly clamp the shielding
5.1.5 Connecting the terminals
The wiring diagram is contained in the appendix.
Additionally there is an info field on the modules adja‐
cent to the terminals containing connection informa‐
tion.
A0508
Fig. 13: Removing the cable insulation
1.
Remove the insulation from the fork ends according to
Fig. 13 and press on the corresponding cable end sleeves
2.
Pull off the terminal blocks P1 to P4 for installation
3.
To fit the cable, push the supplied screwdriver right into the
square opening of the corresponding terminal in order to plug
the cable end into the terminal block
4.
Connect the cables according to the wiring diagram
5.
Push the pulled-off terminal blocks back onto the circuit
board after connecting the cables
33
Assembly and installation
6.
Check the cabling using the wiring diagram
5.2 Procedure with DXM housing (small)
5.2.1 Mounting (mechanical)
For wall mounting, please observe the
following steps:
Mounting materials (contained in the scope of delivery):
n
n
n
n
n
n
1 x wall/pipe bracket
2 x half-round head screws 5x45 mm
2 x washers 5.3
2 x rawl plug Ø 8 mm, plastic
1 x sealing cap
1 x safety screw (PT)
2
1
A0273
34
1.
Remove the wall/pipe bracket from the DXM
2.
Pull the two snap hooks outwards and push them upwards
(1)
3.
Fold the wall/pipe bracket away and pull it out (2) in a down‐
wards direction
4.
Mark two drill holes diagonal to each other by using the wall/
pipe bracket as a drilling template
5.
Drill the holes: Ø 8 mm, d = 50 mm
Assembly and installation
A0274
6.
Tighten the wall/pipe bracket
7.
Hook in the housing at the top in the wall/pipe bracket and
push it using light pressure at the bottom against the wall/
pipe bracket. Then press the housing upwards, until it audibly
engages
5.2.2 Installation (electrical)
WARNING!
Safe operating status
During installation the device must not be electrically
live.
The installation must only be carried out by technically
trained personnel.
Observe the technical data in these instructions.
NOTICE!
Cable strain relief
With control panel mounting, the cables must be
routed in a site-provided cable duct to ensure strain
relief.
For wall mounting
1.
2.
Undo the four housing screws.
NOTICE!
The hinge between the front and rear part of the
housing cannot absorb high mechanical loading.
When working on the front part of the housing
you must support it.
Raise the front part slightly forwards and then fold out to the
left.
35
Assembly and installation
A0272
3.
The large threaded cable gland (M20 x 1.5) is
only for use with the coaxial cable.
Punch out as many threaded holes on the bottom side of the
rear part as required
A0497
Fig. 14
1.
2.
3.
4.
36
Threaded cable gland
Reducing insert
Clamping nut
Terminal diagram
4.
Screw the corresponding threaded cable glands (1) in and
tighten
5.
Insert the reducing inserts (2) in the threaded cable glands
according to the cable cross section used
6.
Guide the cables into the threaded cable glands
Assembly and installation
7.
Further steps are contained in Ä Chapter 5.1.4 ‘Connect the
coaxial cable’ on page 33 and Ä Chapter 5.1.5 ‘Connecting
the terminals’ on page 33
ð Thereafter please continue with the following steps:
8.
Tighten the union nuts (3) of the threaded cable glands so
that they are properly sealed
9.
Fold the front part onto the rear part
10.
NOTICE!
Protection class IP 65
Once again check the seating of the seal. Pro‐
tection class IP 65 is only achieved if the control
panel mounting is correct.
As necessary, pull the front part slightly forwards
to relieve the strain on the seal.
Manually tighten the housing screws
For control panel mounting (internal
module)
NOTICE!
Cable strain relief
With control panel mounting, the cables must be
routed in a site-provided cable duct to ensure strain
relief.
Connect the cables as follows: Ä Chapter 5.1.4 ‘Connect the
coaxial cable’ on page 33 and Ä Chapter 5.1.5 ‘Connecting
the terminals’ on page 33
5.3 install the CAN bus cable
CAUTION!
Maximum backbone length
Possible consequence: Malfunctions.
–
The maximum backbone length (without branching
cables) must be less than 400 m
CAUTION!
Maximum length of branching cables
Possible consequence: Malfunctions.
The T-pieces and connecting cables (branching
cables) enclosed with the modules (M-, A-, G-, N-, R-,
I- modules, CAN sensors and metering pumps with
CAN bus must be used.
Branching cables are the connections branching from
the CAN bus backbone to the modules.
37
Assembly and installation
5.3.1 Connections outside the housing
CAUTION!
T-coupling
Never connect a T-coupling directly to the housing.
The panel plug at the housing can break off.
CAUTION!
IP65 protection rating
Screw in the CAN cable threaded cable glands by
hand up to the stop. Otherwise the IP65 rating is not
achieved.
NOTICE!
Sequentially screw together the individual parts of the
CAN bus line starting from one side. Otherwise it can
occur that at one or several points socket is aligned
with socket or plug with plug.
CAN devices always have plugs, never sockets.
CAN bus line
External modules, CAN version of chlorine sensor and
DULCOMARIN® II are connected with each other via a
CAN bus line. The individual CAN devices are inserted
in this CAN bus line. There is a terminating resistance
at each end of the CAN bus line.
38
1.
Connect the supplied branching cables (e.g. 0.5 m) with a Tpiece on the end to each module and the DULCOMARIN® II
2.
Screw the T-pieces of the CAN modules sequentially
together using CAN cables or directly one after the other
3.
On each of the remaining ends of the CAN bus line screw on
a terminating resistance (1 x with a plug connector, 1 x with a
socket connector).
Assembly and installation
Fig. 15: Inserting modules in the CAN bus line, compact version
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CAN connection cable (branching cable 0.5 m)
Terminating resistance, M12 socket
T-coupling
CAN connection cable
Chlorine sensor CTE
6.
7.
8.
9.
Chlorine sensor CLE
CAN connection cable (branching cable 0.5 m)
T-coupling
Terminating resistance, M12 plug
39
Assembly and installation
I.
II.
III.
A0499
Fig. 16: Inserting modules in the CAN bus line
I.
II.
40
Control room
Plant room, e.g. pool 1
III.
A.
Plant room, e.g. pool 2
Terminating resistance at the end of the CAN
bus line (the system can be extended from
here)
Assembly and installation
5.3.2 Connections inside the DXC housing
In general it is not necessary to make modification to
the cable connectors inside the DXC housing
All CAN bus cables end at the P module (power supply module
with relay) or the N module (power supply module):
n the 5 conductors of the panel plug CAN 1 (4) at (3)
n the 16 pole ribbon cable of the display and operating module
(not shown) at (2)
n the 10 pole ribbon cable from the A module (control module)
(6) and from the M module (measurement module) (5) at (1)
A0500
Fig. 17: CAN cabling inside the DXC housing
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cable connection to the display and operating
module
Cable connection to the A and M modules
Cable connection to the panel plug CAN 1
Panel plug CAN 1
5.
6.
7.
M module (measurement module)
A module (control module)
P module (power supply module with relay)
41
Assembly and installation
If there is no P module or N module in the DXC housing:
n Use a so-called L circuit board as a distributor for the CAN bus
lines
2.
1.
4.
3.
A0501
Fig. 18: Use of an L circuit board
1.
2.
42
Cable connection to the A and M modules
Cable connection to the display and operating
module
3.
4.
Cable connection to the panel plug CAN 1
Panel plug CAN 1
Device overview and operating elements
6
Device overview and operating elements
Keys
A0502
Fig. 19: Keys
1.
2.
3.
Enter key
Start/Stop key
ESC key
4.
5.
Arrow keys
Function keys, variably assigned
43
Device overview and operating elements
Displays
A0503
Fig. 20: Displays
1. LCD display
2. CAN 1-LED
3. Device LED
44
Functional description (general)
7
Functional description (general)
A0504
Fig. 21: Measurement and control system for a filter circuit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Multi-channel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II
In-line probe housing DGMa
Chlorine sensor CLE
Chlorine sensor CTE
T-coupling
Terminating resistance, M12 socket
Terminating resistance, M12 plug
CAN connection cable
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
I.
pH sensor
ORP sensor
Coaxial cable
Control line
Metering pump 1
Metering pump 2
Signal horn
Plant room
The multi-channel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II is suitable for controlling one or more systems
(filtration circuits, pools ...) (version dependent).
The base functions are distributed over the following modules:
n
n
n
n
M module (measurement module)
I module (current input module)
A module (control module)
R module (control module for chlorine gas metering devices)
45
Functional description (general)
n P module (power supply module with relay)
n N module (power supply module)
M module (measurement module)
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Measuring and control of the pH value
Measuring and display (optional rules) of the redox potential
Measuring and display of the temperature of the sample water
Measuring and display of the circulating flow
Monitoring the sample water
Measuring the temperature of the sample water
Measuring of free chlorine
Measuring of total chlorine chlorine
Displaying of combined chlorine
– optional; calculated from total chlorine and free chlorine
Chlorine sensors:
n Measuring of free chlorine and temperature
n Measuring of total available chlorine and temperature
n Measuring of combined chlorine as a chlorine difference meas‐
urement
I module (current input module)
n Measurement monitoring and pause (2 contact inputs)
n Connection of 3 sensors
– (3 standard signal inputs 0/4...20 mA, of which 2 as 2-con‐
ductor connection)
n Measuring and control of fluoride
n Measuring and control of ClO2
n Measuring and control of chlorite
n Measuring and control of H2O2
n Measuring of PES (peracetic acid)
n Measuring and display of dissolved oxygen2
n Measuring and display of ammonia
n Measuring and display of conductive conductivity
n Measuring and display of flow
n Measuring and display of turbidity
n Measuring and display of UV intensity
A module (control module)
n Control of metering pumps for pH correction and disinfectant
metering (over 3 frequency outputs, 3 contact inputs for pump
errors or container level monitoring)
n Output of measured values for pH value, redox potential, free
chlorine or total chlorine or combined chlorine or temperature
(4 analog outputs 0/4...20 mA, freely programmable and scal‐
able)
R module (control module for chlorine gas metering devices)
n Control of a servomotor with response signal for disinfectant
metering (2 relay outputs, position feedback input)
P module (power supply module with relay)
n Control of solenoid valve or hose pump for pH correction (via
pulse length output)
n Control of solenoid valve or hose pump for disinfectant (via
pulse length output)
n Control of hose pump for flocculant (via pulse length output) on
minimisation of the combined chlorine (via relay output)
46
Functional description (general)
n Alarm (via relay output)
n Provision of the CAN bus with supply voltage
N module (power supply module)
n Provision of the CAN bus with supply voltage
CANopen metering pumps (Beta/4a, delta DLTa, Sigma S1CaS2Ca-S3Ca)
n Metering of pH correction agents, disinfectants or flocculants
47
Maintenance, repairs and disposal
8
Maintenance, repairs and disposal
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Solvent
Do not under any circumstances use solvent to clean
the surfaces. Solvent can attack the surfaces.
Clean the housing with a damp cloth. Then rub dry.
The DULCOMARIN® II is maintenance free. Replace the batteries
after 10 years as a precautionary measure. The DULCOMARIN® II
displays a warning should replacement be necessary sooner.
Battery type: CR2032, 3 V approx. 190 mAh
The battery is clamped in a holder on the rear side of the DXC
housing upper section.
A0505
Fig. 22: Removing the battery
1.
Unscrew the four retaining screws at the front on the housing
upper section and take the housing upper section off from the
housing lower section.
NOTICE!
Hazardous waste
The battery is hazardous waste. It must be disposed of
separately. Observe the conditions which apply on
your site.
2.
Press on the holder lug to release the battery from the
holder, see Fig. 22
3.
Insert a new battery in the holder
ð In so doing avoid pressing with the fingers on the battery
poles. This will result in poor contacts.
Repairs
48
4.
Place the housing upper section on the housing lower section
5.
Manually tighten the four retaining screws
For repair please send the DULCOMARIN® II to the manufacturer.
Maintenance, repairs and disposal
8.1 Disposal of used parts
n Users' qualification: instructed persons, see Ä Chapter 2.2
‘Users' qualifications’ on page 16
NOTICE!
Regulations governing disposal of used parts
– Note the current national regulations and legal
standards which apply in your country
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH, Heidelberg will take back decon‐
taminated used devices providing that they are covered by ade‐
quate postage.
49
Technical data spare parts and accessories
9
Technical data spare parts and accessories
Technical data
You can find the technical data in the operating instructions of the
individual modules, see also the section "Further applicable docu‐
ments".
Spare parts and accessories
Description:
Part no.
T-coupler M12 5-pole CAN
1022155
Terminating resistance, M12 socket
1022154
Terminating resistance, M12 plug
1022592
Connecting cable - CAN M12, 5 pole 0.5 m
1022137
Connecting cable - CAN M12, 5 pole 1m
1022139
Connecting cable - CAN M12, 5 pole 2 m
1022140
Connecting cable - CAN M12, 5 pole 5 m
1022141
Connecting cable - CAN M12, 5 pole Sold by the metre
1022160
Plug-CAN M12 5 pole Screwed connection
1022156
Coupling - CAN M12 5 pole Screwed connection
1022157
Cable combination coaxial 0.8 m-SN6, pre-assembled
1024105
Cable combination coaxial 2 m-SN6, pre-assembled
1024106
Cable combination coaxial 5 m-SN6, pre-assembled
1024107
Control cable by the metre 2x0.25 mm2
725122
Fuse 5x20 slow-acting 0.63 AT VDE
712030
Battery 3 V approx. 190 mAh Li cell BR2032
732829
Buffer solution pH 4, red, 50 ml
506251
Buffer solution pH 7, green, 50 ml
506253
Buffer solution redox 465 mV, 50 ml
506240
Redox sensor RHES-Pt-SE
150703
pH sensor PHES 112 SE
150702
Chlorine sensor CLE 3-CAN-10 ppm*
1023425
Chlorine sensor CLE 3.1-CAN-10 ppm*
1023426
Chlorine sensor CTE 1 CAN-10 ppm*
1023427
Chlorine sensor CGE 2-CAN-10 ppm*
1024420
* Membrane caps and electrolyte for chlorine sensors, see the respective operating instructions of the
sensor
50
EC Declaration of Conformity and fulfilled standards
10
EC Declaration of Conformity and fulfilled standards
EC Declaration of Conformity
We,
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
D - 69123 Heidelberg
hereby declare that the product identified below conforms to the basic health and safety
requirementsof the EC Directive, by virtueof its design and construction, and in the configuration
placed on the market by us.
This declaration is no longerapplicable if changesare madetothe product without our authorisation.
Productdescription:
DULCOMARIN II measuring and control unit
Producttype:
Serial no.:
see type plate on the unit
Applicable
EC Directives:
EC Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)
EC EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
Applied harmonised
standards,
especially:
Date/ Manufacturer signature:
Name/ positionof the signatory:
Joachim Schall, Manager Innovation and Technology
Fig. 23: EC Declaration of Conformity
51
Wiring diagram DULCOMARIN® II compact
11
Wiring diagram DULCOMARIN® II compact
A0506
Fig. 24: Wiring diagram DULCOMARIN® II compact (typical arrangement of modules)
I. M module (measurement module) DXMaM
II. A module (control module) DXMaA
III. P module (power supply module with relay) DXMaP
52
Wiring diagram DULCOMARIN® II compact
Comprehensive module populating options are listed in the "Sup‐
plementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, DXMa Modules".
M module (measurement module) DXMaM
Description
Terminal
identifier
Temp. input
Pt1000/100
RTD
Redox input 1
ORP(pH)
Ter‐
minal
no.
Pole
1
+
2
-
3
Ref.
4
meas
sig.
Pot.1
5
Potential equali‐
sation 2
Pot.2
6
pH input 2
ORP(pH)
7
Ref.
8
meas
sig.
9
+
10
-
11
+
12
-
13
+
14
-
Contact input 2
Contact input 3
K1
K2
K3
Cable
⌀
Drill hole
no.
Remarks
Size
Potential equali‐
sation 1
Contact input 1
Function
Temp.- sensor
d5
1/M16
Redox - sensor
d3/d5
2/M20
Guide cable
through multiple
seal inserts 2x5
or 2x4
11/M12
pH - sensor
11/M12
d3/d5
2/M20
Guide cable
through multiple
seal inserts 2x5
Fault sample
water
d4
3/M16
Guide cable
through multiple
seal inserts 2x4
Pause (back‐
washing)
d4
3/M16
"
ECO!Mode
d4
12/M12
53
Wiring diagram DULCOMARIN® II compact
A module (control module) DXMaA
Description
Relay output 1
Terminal
identifier
R1
Ter‐
minal
no.
Pole
Function*
Cable
⌀
1
+
Control acid pump d5
2
-
or
Drill hole
no.
Remarks
Size
13/M12
Control alkali
pump
Relay output 2
R2
3
+
4
-
Control chlorine
pump
d5
14/M12
d5
15/M12
d4
4/M20
Guide 2 cables
through multiple
seal inserts 2x4
d4
4/M20
Guide 2 cables
through multiple
seal inserts 2x4
d4
5/M16
Guide 2 cables
through multiple
seal inserts 2x4
pH plotter connec‐ d4
tion
6/M16
Guide 2 cables
through multiple
seal inserts 2x4
Redox plotter con‐ d4
nection
6/M16
Guide 2 cables
through multiple
seal inserts 2x4
Chlorine free
plotter connection
d4
/M16
Guide 2 cables
through multiple
seal inserts 2x4
Comb. chlorine
plotter connection
d4
7/M16
Guide 2 cables
through multiple
seal inserts 2x4
Control acid pump
Control redox
pump
Relay output 3
R3
5
+
6
-
Control flocculant
pump
Control chlorine
pump
Control redox
pump
Contact input 1
K1
7
+
Pump error
8
-
or
Filling level
Contact input 2
K2
9
+
Pump error
10
-
or
Filling level
Contact input 3
K3
11
+
Pump error
12
-
or
Filling level
Current output
0/4-20mA 1
I out 1
Current output
0/4-20mA 2
I out 2
Current output
0/4-20mA 3
I out 3
Current output
0/4-20mA 4
I out 4
13
+
14
-
15
+
16
-
17
+
18
-
19
+
20
-
or
Temperature
plotter connection
54
Wiring diagram DULCOMARIN® II compact
P module (power supply module with relay) DXMaP
Description
Terminal
identifier
Terminal Pole
no.
Function
Cable
⌀
Drill hole
no.
Size
Alarm relay
P1
1
Horn control
d6.5
8/M16
4
Control acid solenoid valve
d6.5
9/M16
5
or
d6.5
18/M12
d6.5
19/M12
d6.5
10/M16
2
3
Power relay 1
P2
Control alkali solenoid valve
Power relay 2
P3
6
Control chlorine solenoid valve
7
or
Control redox solenoid valve
or
Control acid solenoid valve
or
Control alkali solenoid valve
Power relay 3
P4
8
Control UV (ozone, active
carbon)
9
or
Control redox solenoid valve
or
Control chlorine solenoid valve
or
Control heating
Mains
X1
10
PE
11
N
12
L(1)
CAN connection module
Description
Terminal iden‐
tifier
CAN 1 - bus connection CAN 1
Terminal no.
Pole
Cable ⌀
Drill hole no.
Size
1
Shielding
Plug
2
24 V
A coding
3
ground
4
CAN high
5
CAN low
16/M12
55
Index
12
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
10 pole ribbon cable.............................................
16 pole ribbon cable.............................................
A
Accessories..........................................................
Ambient conditions...............................................
Automatic start-up................................................
B
Battery type: CR2032, 3 V approx. 190 mAh.......
Branching cables..................................................
C
Cable strain relief.................................................
CAN bus backbone..............................................
CAN bus line........................................................
CANopen third party devices...............................
Central unit...........................................................
CR2032................................................................
D
Degree of protection.............................................
DIN IEC 60068-2-30.............................................
Displays................................................................
Disposal...............................................................
DULCO-Net..........................................................
E
External modules in the CAN bus backbone.......
F
Failure of the circulating pumps...........................
H
Hazardous substances.........................................
Hazardous waste.................................................
I
Identity code.........................................................
Internet Explorer...................................................
56
41
41
50
20
18
48
26
30
26
38
18
25
48
18
20
44
48
25
26
30
18
48
12
12
IP 54.....................................................................
IP65 protection rating...........................................
K
Keys.....................................................................
L
LAN coupling........................................................
L circuit board.......................................................
M
Maximum length of branching cables..................
Microsoft Internet Explorer...................................
Mounting materials (contained in the scope of
delivery)................................................................
P
Power supply module...........................................
R
Repairs.................................................................
Requirements for the installation site ..................
S
Safe operating status...........................................
Safety information................................................
Screwdriver..........................................................
Sold by the metre.................................................
Spare parts...........................................................
T
T-coupling............................................................
Terminating resistance.........................................
U
Users' qualifications.............................................
W
Wall/pipe bracket..................................................
Wall mounting......................................................
32
38
43
12
42
26
12
34
25
48
20
30
15
30
26
50
38
39
16
35
34
Operating instructions
Multi-Channel Measuring and Control System
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and
Disinfection Controller DXCa
Part 2: Operation
A0204
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 986206
BA DC 067 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986206, 3, en_GB
© 2011
58
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Further applicable documents............................................. 61
2
Introduction......................................................................... 62
2.1 Explanation of the safety information.......................... 62
2.2 Users' qualifications.................................................... 63
3
Safety and responsibility..................................................... 65
3.1 General Safety Information......................................... 65
3.2 Correct and Proper Use ............................................. 66
4
Functional description......................................................... 67
5
Control elements ................................................................ 68
5.1 Function of the buttons............................................... 68
5.2 Access code (password)............................................. 70
6
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules..................
6.1 Logging modules on and off.......................................
6.2 Commissioning CAN-Beta pump................................
6.3 Commissioning R module...........................................
72
72
74
77
7
Structure of the of the operating menu...............................
7.1 Structural principle......................................................
7.2 Permanent display......................................................
7.3 Central menu item......................................................
7.4 Log off SD card safely................................................
7.5 Generally applicable states.........................................
7.6 Menus underneath the central menu item..................
7.7 Submenus of the parametric assignment menu.........
79
79
80
81
82
83
85
87
8
Calibration........................................................................... 88
8.1 Calibration of pH measured variable.......................... 89
8.1.1 1-Point calibration pH.............................................. 89
8.1.2 2-Point calibration pH.............................................. 91
8.2 Redox measured variable........................................... 93
8.3 Calibrate measured variable "chlorine free"............... 94
8.4 Calibrate measured variable "Total chlorine".............. 99
8.5 Calibrate measured variable for fluoride (F-)............ 105
8.6 Calibrate measured variable for chlorine dioxide
(CIO2)........................................................................ 107
8.7 Calibrate measured variable hydrogen peroxide
(H2O2)....................................................................... 111
8.8 Measured variable chlorite (CIO2 -)........................... 114
8.9 Calibrate measured variable for peracetic acid
(PES)........................................................................ 117
8.10 Calibration measured variable temperature............ 119
9
Assign parameters............................................................
9.1 All parameters...........................................................
9.2 Measurement............................................................
9.2.1 Parametric assignment pH....................................
9.2.2 Parametric assignment redox................................
9.2.3 Parametric assignment "chlorine free"...................
9.2.4 Parametric assignment "chlorine bound"...............
9.2.5 Parametric assignment fluoride (F−)......................
9.2.6 Parametric assignment ClO2 ................................
120
120
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
59
Table of contents
9.2.7 Parametric assignment H2O2 ................................ 126
9.3 Control......................................................................
9.3.1 pH Control..............................................................
9.3.2 Redox control.........................................................
9.3.3 Free chlorine control..............................................
9.3.4 Control for bound chlorine.....................................
9.3.5 Control temperature...............................................
9.3.6 Control flocculants.................................................
9.3.7 Control fluoride (F−)...............................................
9.3.8 Control chlorine dioxide (CIO2)..............................
127
128
130
132
133
134
135
136
138
9.3.9 Control H2O2 ......................................................... 139
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
10
60
Set mA output...........................................................
Alarm settings...........................................................
Parametric assignment flow meter...........................
Setting Eco!Mode.....................................................
Chlorine dosing redox dependent.............................
141
142
144
145
146
Configure..........................................................................
10.1 Configuring module DXMaM...................................
10.1.1 Configuring module DXMaM ECO mode.............
10.2 Configuring module DXMaA...................................
10.2.1 Configuring module DXMaA circulation pump.....
10.3 Configuring module DXMaP...................................
10.4 Configuration for free chlorine module....................
10.5 Configuration for total chlorine module...................
10.6 Configuration for chlorine module...........................
10.7 Configuration of R module (control module for
chlorine gas metering device) ................................
10.8 Configuration for P1 module (metering pump
module) ..................................................................
10.9 G module (limit value module) configuration..........
10.10 I module (current input module) configuration .....
148
149
150
156
159
162
164
165
166
167
168
170
171
11
Maintenance .................................................................... 175
11.1 Configure maintenance timer.................................. 175
12
Troubleshooting................................................................ 177
13
Glossary of technical terms............................................... 184
14
Index................................................................................. 191
Further applicable documents
1
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa
– Part 1: Assembly and installation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II Screen writer
operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, M-Module
(measuring module for pH, redox [ORP], temperature) DXMaM
operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, I-Module (cur‐
rent input module, standard signal inputs mA) DXMal
61
Introduction
2
Introduction
The operating instructions describe the technical data and func‐
tions of the multi-channel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disinfection Con‐
troller DXCa. The operating instructions subsequently refer to the
system merely as DXCa.
2.1 Explanation of the safety information
Introduction
These operating instructions provide information on the technical
data and functions of the product. These operating instructions pro‐
vide detailed safety information and are provided as clear step-bystep instructions.
The safety information and notes are categorised according to the
following scheme. A number of different symbols are used to
denote different situations. The symbols shown here serve only as
examples.
DANGER!
Nature and source of the danger
Consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries.
Measure to be taken to avoid this danger
Danger!
–
Denotes an immediate threatening danger. If this is
disregarded, it will result in fatal or very serious
injuries.
WARNING!
Nature and source of the danger
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries.
Measure to be taken to avoid this danger
Warning!
–
Denotes a possibly hazardous situation. If this is
disregarded, it could result in fatal or very serious
injuries.
CAUTION!
Nature and source of the danger
Possible consequence: Slight or minor injuries, mate‐
rial damage.
Measure to be taken to avoid this danger
Caution!
–
62
Denotes a possibly hazardous situation. If this is
disregarded, it could result in slight or minor inju‐
ries. May also be used as a warning about material
damage.
Introduction
NOTICE!
Nature and source of the danger
Damage to the product or its surroundings
Measure to be taken to avoid this danger
Note!
–
Denotes a possibly damaging situation. If this is
disregarded, the product or an object in its vicinity
could be damaged.
Type of information
Hints on use and additional information
Source of the information, additional measures
Information!
–
Denotes hints on use and other useful information.
It does not indicate a hazardous or damaging sit‐
uation.
2.2 Users' qualifications
WARNING!
Danger of injury with inadequately qualified personnel!
The operator of the plant / device is responsible for
ensuring that the qualifications are fulfilled.
If inadequately qualified personnel work on the unit or
loiter in the hazard zone of the unit, this could result in
dangers that could cause serious injuries and material
damage.
–
–
All work on the unit should therefore only be con‐
ducted by qualified personnel.
Unqualified personnel should be kept away from
the hazard zone
Training
Definition
Instructed personnel
An instructed person is deemed to be a person who has been instructed and,
if required, trained in the tasks assigned to him/her and possible dangers that
could result from improper behaviour, as well as having been instructed in the
required protective equipment and protective measures.
Trained user
A trained user is a person who fulfils the requirements made of an instructed
person and who has also received additional training specific to the system
from ProMinent or another authorised distribution partner.
Trained qualified per‐
sonnel
A qualified employee is deemed to be a person who is able to assess the
tasks assigned to him and recognize possible hazards based on his/her
training, knowledge and experience, as well as knowledge of pertinent regula‐
tions. The assessment of a person's technical training can also be based on
several years of work in the relevant field.
63
Introduction
Training
Definition
Electrician
Electricians are deemed to be people, who are able to complete work on elec‐
trical systems and recognize and avoid possible hazards independently based
on his/her technical training and experience, as well as knowledge of pertinent
standards and regulations.
Electricians should be specifically trained for the working environment in
which the are employed and know the relevant standards and regulations.
Electricians must comply with the provisions of the applicable statutory direc‐
tives on accident prevention.
Customer Service depart‐
ment
Customer Service department refers to service technicians, who have
received proven training and have been authorised by ProMinent to work on
the system.
Note for the system operator
The pertinent accident prevention regulations, as well
as all other generally acknowledged safety regulations,
must be adhered to!
64
Safety and responsibility
3
Safety and responsibility
3.1 General Safety Information
WARNING!
Live parts!
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries
–
–
Measure: Disconnect the mains power supply prior
to opening the housing
De-energise damaged, defective or manipulated
units by disconnecting the mains plug
WARNING!
Unauthorised access!
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries
–
Measure: Ensure that there can be no unauthor‐
ised access to the unit
WARNING!
Operating errors!
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries
–
–
–
The unit should only be operated by adequately
qualified and technically expert personnel
Please also observe the operating instructions for
controllers and fittings and any other component
groups, such as sensors, measuring water
pumps ...
The operator is responsible for ensuring that per‐
sonnel are qualified
CAUTION!
Electronic malfunctions
Possible consequence: Material damage to destruction
of the unit
–
–
The mains connection cable and data cable should
not be laid together with cables that are prone to
interference
Measure: Take appropriate interference suppres‐
sion measures
NOTICE!
Correct and proper use
Damage to the product or its surroundings
–
–
The unit is not intended to measure or regulate
gaseous or solid media
The unit may only be used in accordance with the
technical details and specifications provided in
these operating instructions and in the operating
instructions for the individual components
65
Safety and responsibility
NOTICE!
Correct sensor operation / Run-in time
Damage to the product or its surroundings
–
–
–
–
–
Correct measuring and dosing is only possible if
the sensor is working perfectly
It is imperative that the run-in times of the sensors
are adhered to
The run-in times should be allowed for when plan‐
ning initial operation
It may take a whole working day to run-in the
sensor
Please read the operating instructions for the
sensor
NOTICE!
Correct sensor operation
Damage to the product or its surroundings
–
–
Correct measuring and dosing is only possible if
the sensor is working perfectly
Check and calibrate the sensor regularly
NOTICE!
Compensation of control deviations
Damage to the product or its surroundings
–
This controller cannot be used in control circuits
which require rapid compensation (< 30 s)
3.2 Correct and Proper Use
NOTICE!
Compensation for control deviations
Damage to the product or its surroundings
–
The controller can be used in processes, which
require compensation of > 30 seconds
NOTICE!
Correct and Proper Use
The unit is intended to measure and regulate liquid
media.
The unit may only be used in accordance with the
technical details and specifications provided in this
operating manual and in the operating manuals for the
individual components (such as, for example, sensors,
fittings, calibration devices, metering pumps etc.).
Any other uses or modifications are prohibited.
66
Functional description
4
Functional description
The DXCa is a measuring and control unit designed to handle the
specific requirements of drinking water treatment.
For this reason it is extremely versatile when combined with a var‐
ious different measuring and actuating modules.
ProMinent uses a bus system in the DXCa in order to network the
sensors and actuators with the controller.
The standard bus system CANopen® is used.
All of the modules work according to Plug & Play principles. This is
a flexible system that can be realised to meet the requirements of a
compact or decentralised modular system and which is ready for
any future requirements that may be needed.
The DXCa can process measured values from up to 16 systems /
pools.
The I-Module enables up to 3 (third-party)-sensors with mA signals
to be connected per system / pool, e.g. for flow, turbidity and UV
intensity.
Metering pumps, chlorine gas metering systems or chlorine dioxide
production plants can be controlled directly in relation to these
measured parameters. There is also the option of using the flow
signal as interference value for the controlled measured variables.
The DXCa is equipped with an integrated data logger and option‐
ally an embedded web server and OPC server, which enables the
measured values and messages to be transferred to a control
panel via LAN/Ethernet.
Possible measured variables
Measured variable
pH compensated
pH
Free chlorine (CI)
X
total available chlorine (CI)
X
Oxygen (02)
Fluoride (F−)
X
Chlorine dioxide (CIO2)
Chlorite (HClO2)
Ammonia (NH3) /Ammonium (NH4 +)
X
Turbidity
Hydrogen peroxide (H2O2)
Temperature
Peracetic acid (PES) (C2H4O3)
Conductivity
Ultra violet rays (UV)
67
Control elements
5
Control elements
Fig. 1: Buttons and displays
1
2
3
4
5
ENTER button
LAN LED
CAN 1-LED
DXC-LED
System LED
6
7
8
9
10
START/STOP key
ESC button
Arrow keys
Function keys, variably assigned
LCD display
5.1 Function of the buttons
Navigation within the operating menu
Function of the ENTER button:
n Moving from menu item to menu item in the operating menu into deeper tiers of the operating menu
n Selection within a file card of a menu item and confirming
changes
Function of the ESC button:
n Moving from menu item to menu item in the operating menu upwards into higher tiers of the operating menu
ESC button
Repeatedly press the ESC button in order return from
any menu item of the operating menu and back to the
permanent display.
Function of the buttons: UP, DOWN, LEFT, RIGHT:
n Move in a menu item between the file cards of a menu item
n Change between the selections in a file card
68
Control elements
MEAS
pH
CTRL
OUTP
ALARM
Measurement parameters
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
Sensor check: ON
Temp.input: Entry
Temp. value = 25.6 °C
Temp
Flock
11
HELP
DATE
HOME
TIME
LANGUAG
A0130
Fig. 2: Change between the file cards
M
DXMaM
RTD
POT
ORP 1 2 pH
Sensor terminals
RTD: Pt1000/100
(pH)ORP: Redox sensor
POT1 free
POT2 free
pH(ORP): pH sensor
K1
K2
K3
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1 Type: NO
K2: Pause
K2 Type: NO
K3: frei
K3 Type: NO
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0131
Fig. 3: Selection within a file card
The UP and DOWN arrow keys can be used in a selection to
change the displayed numerical value or displayed variable. The
arrow keys LEFT and RIGHT can be used to select the decimal
place of a numerical value which is to be changed.
A0132
Fig. 4: Changing a numerical value
The SAVE function enables you to store the numerical
values or variables in a file card. Some numerical
values such as PASSW, TIME or DATE are stored
with the ENTER button.
HELP
CAL
PARAM
CONFIG
A0133
Fig. 5: Example assignment for the function keys
69
Control elements
WARNING!
Function of the START/STOP key
The START / STOP key can be used to switch the
system currently shown in the display off or on.
The START / STOP button has no influence on other
systems that are not shown in the display.
First select the respective system, before you work
with the START / STOP key.
Function of the START/STOP key
n The START / STOP key can be used to start or stop regulating
or metering. Subsequently the permanent display and the cen‐
tral menu item is shown ‘Metering ON’ or ‘Metering OFF’
5.2 Access code (password)
Access to the device can be granted in steps by setting up an
access code. The DXCa system is supplied with access codes
according to the following table.
Replace the factory-set access codes with your
own access codes.
Otherwise protection to the following menus will be
extremely weak.
When toggling back to the permanent display, the
DXCa automatically resets to level ‘0’ for ‘every
user’
You can set the level immediately to ‘0’ by
pressing the following key combination from the
central menu item: F4 (CONFIG), F2 (OPTION),
F5 (RESTART) - this causes module detection to
be manually started
You can freely calibrate level ‘0’ and ‘1’ if you set
for level ‘1’ (user) the password to ‘0000’ .
–
–
–
–
The various levels enable the following:
Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
(every user)
(user)
(Installation
engineer)
(Service)
(Supervisor)
(ProMinent)
0000
1111
2222
3333
4444
confidential
View
X
X
X
X
X
X
Calibration
X
X
X
X
X
X
Assign
parameters
X
X
X
X
Configure
X
X
X
X
Calibrate Cl
NP
X
X
X
X
Password
(Default)
70
Control elements
Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
(every user)
(user)
(Installation
engineer)
(Service)
(Supervisor)
(ProMinent)
Configure
bus
X
X
X
Update all
modules
X
X
X
X
X
Update indi‐
vidual mod‐
ules
Update cen‐
tral unit
X
Areas protected by access codes:
–
–
–
–
–
Central menu item
Permanent display
pH
7.12
654
Cl free
mg/l Clcomb.
Cltotal
mg/l Temp
1.12
1.25
Q
1
Temp 4-20 mA
10.0 °C
mV
Redox
0.13
Calibrate sensor!
PT1000/100
34.2
System
ClO210.00
7.12
pH
mg/l
°C
1
Dosage: OFF
01.04.10
16:19:21
Cl
Temp
Dosage:
90 %
0.92
PT 1000/100
20. 0
1! Redox
HELP
mg/l
°C
Cl
Q
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration pH
Redox
1.12 mg/l
free
comb.
Set
0.00
01.04.05
654 mV
Redox
Cl
Calibration menu
16:28:57
Pool
1
Childrens pool
Permanent display
Central menu item
Calibration menu
Parameter menu
Configuration menu
total
Set
0.00
1.32
Sensor value =
Zero point
=
Slope
=
Cl free
Dosage:
OFF
Cl tot
mg/l
Temp
CAL1Pt: Calibrate with reference value
or buffer solution
1
--> Value too low
CAL
PARAM CONFIG
pH 7.12
0.24 mV
59.23 mV/pH
CAL1Pt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
LIST
HELP
OFF
HOME
CAL1Pt
CAL1Pt
Parameter menu
Pool
MEAS
pH
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
CTRL
OUTP
1
MEAS
ALARM
pH
Measurement parameters
Sensor check: ON
Temp. input:
ENTRY
Temp. value = 25.6 °C
Measurement parameters
Sensor check: ON
Temp. erfass.: ENTRY
Temp. value = 25.6 °C
Temp
Flock
Request password
HELP
HOME
DATE
TIME
DEFAULT
LANGUAG
SAVE
Configuration menu
Pool 1
M
DXMaM
Pool 1
RTD
POT
ORP 1 2 pH
Sensor terminals
RTD: Pt1000/100
(pH)ORP: Redox sensor
POT1 free
POT2 free
pH(ORP): pH sensor
K1
K2
M
DXMaM
K3
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1 Type: NO
Delay=0000s
K2: Pause
K2 Type: NO
Delay=0000s
K3: free
K3 Type: NO
DEFAULT
SAVE
RTD
POT
ORP 1 2 pH
Sensor terminals
RTD: Pt1000/100
(pH)ORP: Redox sensor
POT1 free
POT2 free
pH(ORP): pH sensor
K1
K2
K3
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1 Type: NO
Delay=0000s
K2: Pause
K2 Type: NO
Delay=0000s
K3: free
K3 Type: NO
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0261
Fig. 6: Access code (password)
Language
You can set the language in submenu [LANGUAGE] .
In order to do so, press function key F5 (LANGUAGE)
in the parameter menu.
71
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules
6
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules
CAUTION!
Delayed data processing
For these actions, you must always allow a few sec‐
onds to elapse between the last message or the last
progress bar and the subsequent action.
You can also use the BUS menu to log modules on
and off, but not temporarily. The central unit does not
store all of the data required for seamlessly restoring
operation of the modules.
Updating software
The corresponding update instructions for available
updates can be requested from ProMinent Dosier‐
technik GmbH.
6.1 Logging modules on and off
Adding a new module
If a new module is inserted into the CAN-configuration for DXCa or
a module has been deleted from the central unit:
The central unit has no data relating to the module.
1.
Connect the module to the CAN bus system.
ð The following message appears on the central menu item
[Configuration service started – LSS node detected ...]
with progress bar.
2.
The following message appears on the permanent display
[New module reported! Press ENTER.].
3.
Press the ENTER button
ð The following message appears on the central menu item
[New module reported! Press ENTER.].
4.
Press the ENTER button
ð The menu [Reconfiguration complete. Press ESC.]
appears.
5.
Press the ESC button
ð the central menu item appears.
Temporarily disconnect a module
72
Temporarily disconnect a module from the CAN bus system
without intermediate replacement:
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules
The central unit stores all of the data required for reassigning the module.
1.
Disconnect the module from the CAN bus system.
ð The following message appears on the central menu item
[Module disconnected! Press ENTER].
2.
Press the ENTER button
ð The menu [Logged off modules] appears.
3.
Press F4 (SAVE), in order that the module remains stored in
the CAN configuration
ð The message [Reconfiguration complete. Press ESC.]
appears.
4.
Press the ESC button
In the configuring menu, the overview at the start
of the submenu [BUS] indicates that the module
[is missing.].
ð the central menu item appears.
Re-assign a temporarily disconnected
module
Re-connect a module that has been temporarily disconnected from
the CAN bus system without intermediate replacement back into
the original CAN bus system:
The central unit will have stored all of the data required
for re-assigning the module.
1.
Connect the module to the CAN bus system.
ð The following message appears on the central menu item
[Configuration service started – LSS node detected … ]
with progress bar.
2.
The following message appears on the permanent display
[Module re-registered! Press ENTER].
3.
Press the ENTER button
ð The following message appears on the central menu item
[Module re-registered! Press ENTER].
4.
Press the ENTER button
ð The menu [Re-registered module detected] appears.
5.
Press F4 (ACCEPT), in order that the module will recom‐
mence operation in accordance with the stored CAN configu‐
ration
ð A progress bar is shown followed by the message
[Reconfiguration complete. Press ESC.].
6.
Press the ESC button
ð The central menu item appears. The module is assigned
to the CAN bus again.
73
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules
Permanently disconnect a module
Permanently disconnect a module from its pool or the DXCa or
insert it into another pool or another DXCa: (The central unit will
delete all of your data related to the module.)
The central unit will delete all of your data related to
the module.
1.
Disconnect the module from the CAN bus system.
ð The following message appears on the central menu item
[Module disconnected! Press ENTER].
2.
Press the ENTER button
3.
Press F2 (DELETE)
4.
Press the ESC button
ð The central menu item appears. The module is logged off
from the CAN bus and all of the module data is deleted
from the central unit.
The module will now be detected as a new module if it
is re-connected to the CAN bus.
6.2 Commissioning CAN-Beta pump
Follow the instructions precisely in order to ensure cor‐
rect detection of the CAN-Beta pump in the CAN bus.
Commissioning a new or non-saved
CAN-Beta pump
Preparation
1.
Start up the central unit if this has not already been done.
2.
Set the pumps to the required stroke length (default 95%)
3.
Check that the multifunctional switch is positioned to BUS
4.
Connect the pump to the CAN bus system
5.
Connect the pump to the supply voltage
ð The following message appears on the central menu item
[Configuration service started – LSS node detected …]
with progress bar.
6.
The following message appears on the permanent display
[New module reported! Press ENTER.].
7.
Press the ENTER button
ð the central menu item appears.
8.
Press the ENTER button
ð The menu [New module detected 1] appears.
74
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules
Assign a system (pool, filtration circuit,
etc.)
DXMaM DXMaR DXMaG
DXMaA Cl
DXMaI
DXMaP CL tot
Pump 1
Pump 2
Allocated
DXMaS1
DXMaS2
DXMaS3
1
System
Pump 3 Pump 4
Expected
New module detected
Free
1
New module detected
Pump 1
Serial number
1
2006036753
Module will be configured in:
System
1
No:
1
HELP
DELETE
OK
ACCEPT
A0266
Fig. 7: New module detected 1
Assign a pump number
1.
With the arrow keys select [System] and press the ENTER
key
2.
Enter the desired system number with the arrow keys and
press the ENTER key
1.
With the arrow keys select [No.] and press the ENTER button
2.
Enter the desired number for the pump (1 - 4) with the arrow
keys and press the ENTER button
Save CAN configuration
System 1
Name:
Childrens pool
DXMaM
DXMaA
DXMaP
DXMaR
Cl
Cl tot
Pump 1
Pump 2
Pump 3
Pump 4
DXMaS1
DXMaS2
DXMaS3
DXMaG
DXMaI
2004106040
1254552546
5445454444
1212144665
2154545665
5442121212
1121121212
not connected
not connected
not connected
not connected
not connected
not connected
not connected
16554323565
17
14
13
16
11
12
10
15
SAVE
A0267
Fig. 8: Save assignment
1.
Press F4 (ACCEPT) in order to store the CAN configuration
or press the ENTER button in order to change the entry
2.
Press the ENTER button in order to change the name of the
system (e.g. from ‘Children's pool’ to ‘swimming pool’ .)
3.
F5 (SAVE) in display, see Fig. 8
ð Data will be saved
4.
Press the ESC button
ð Permanent display appears. The CAN configuration is
now saved
75
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules
Assign the pump a purpose
1.
Press the following key combination in the central menu item
in order to assign the pump a purpose: F4 (CONFIG)
2.
LEFT/RIGHT (file card P1 or P2 ...)
ð The file card with the assignment number of the respec‐
tive pump has been selected.
3.
Press the ENTER button
4.
Press the ENTER button
5.
Enter the desired purpose by means of the vertical arrow
keys and press the ENTER key
ð For example [P1 Bus metering pump] appears on the dis‐
play
6.
Press F5 (SAVE)
ð Prompt
[Save dialog, really save?; no=ESC, yes=ENTER]
appears on the display
7.
Press the ENTER button
8.
Subsequently press the ESC button
ð The pump has been assigned and saved. You can now
exit the menu with the ESC button
Commissioning a stored CAN-Beta
pump
Preparation
1.
Start up the central unit if this has not already been done
2.
Set the pumps to the required stroke length (default 95%)
3.
Check that the multifunctional switch is positioned to BUS
4.
Connect the pump to the CAN bus system
5.
Connect the pump to the supply voltage
ð The following message appears on the central menu item
[Configuration service started – LSS node detected …]
with progress bar.
6.
The following message appears on the permanent display
[ Module re-registered! Press ENTER.].
7.
Press the ENTER button
ð the central menu item appears.
8.
Press the ENTER button
ð The menu [Module redetected] appears.
9.
Press F4 (ACCEPT)
ð The module will be accepted
10.
Press the ESC button
ð Permanent display appears
76
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules
6.3 Commissioning R module
WARNING!
Emergency measures
The plant operator is responsible for establishing a set
of emergency measures for the event of a chloric gas
leak.
All persons who are able to do so are responsible for
carrying out such emergency measures in the event of
a chloric gas leak.
WARNING!
Chloric gas can leak
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries
Shut off the chloric gas metering system before com‐
missioning. Otherwise chloric gas can leak out.
Check and enable an emergency stop system for the
chloric gas metering system and emergency measures
before commissioning.
Test the connection to R module
Shut off chloric gas metering
The test can be aborted at any time with F2 (STOP) this causes the chloric gas metering unit to shut down.
The chloric gas supply is then stopped.
1.
Press F4 (TEST)
ð The TEST menu appears.
Calibrate R module
2.
Manually control the chloric gas metering unit with the keys
F3 (CLOSE) and F4 (OPEN) in order to test it
3.
Press the F5 key (QUIT) in order to exit the menu
Shut off chloric gas metering
The test can be aborted at any time with F2 (STOP) this causes the chloric gas metering unit to shut down.
The chloric gas supply is then stopped.
77
Commissioning: Configuring the CAN modules
At every point in time, the file card indicates the current
opening angle of the chloric gas metering unit (= posi‐
tion in %; low number = valve relatively closed, large
number = valve relatively open).
1.
Successively press the buttons (CAL) and F2 (START)
ð The following message appears [Calibration is running].
The DXCa initially closes the chloric gas metering unit.
Subsequently it carries out two calibration cycles (open
and close). At each end position, the DXCa waits briefly
in order to evaluate the consistency of the potentiometer
signal.
When calibration has been completed, the following
appears [Calibration completed] [Press QUIT].
2.
Press the F5 key (QUIT) in order to exit the calibration menu.
ð After pressing the F5 key (SAVE) and the ENTER key,
the DXCa opens the chloric gas metering unit in accord‐
ance with the current actuating variable.
78
Structure of the of the operating menu
7
Structure of the of the operating menu
7.1 Structural principle
Daueranzeige
pH
Cl free
1.12
Cltotal
1.25
Q
1
mg/l Clcomb.
654
10.00
mg/l
Sensor kalibrieren!
PT1000/100
34.2
System
1
Childrens pool
Dosage:
°C
ERROR
OFF
01.04.10
16:19:21
10.0 °C
Cl
Set
0.00
7.12
1.12 mg/l
free
Cl comb.
1! Redox
HELP
01.04.05
Dosage:
90 %
0.92
PT 1000/100
20. 0
mg/l
°C
Cl total
Q
CAL
pH
654 mV
Redox
Temp
Calibration menu
16:28:57
Pool
1
Childrens pool
pH
0.13
mg/l Temp
ClO2-
Temp 4-20 mA
Central menu item
mV
Redox
7.12
Sensor calibration pH
Redox
Set
0.00
Dosage:
OFF
Cl tot
mg/l
1.32
Sensor value =
Zero point
=
Slope
=
Cl free
Temp
CAL1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
1
--> Value too low
CAL
PARAM CONFIG
pH 7.12
0.24 mV
59.23 mV/pH
CAL2Pt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
LIST
HELP
OFF
10
HOME
CAL1Pt
CAL2Pt
Parameter menu
Pool
MEAS
pH
Request password
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
CTRL
OUTP
1
Pool
MEAS
ALARM
pH
Measurement parameters
Sensor check:
Temp. input:
Temp. value =
1
MEAS
Measurement parameters
ON
Entry
25.6 °C
Sensor check:
Temp. input:
Temp. value =
pH
Measurement parameters
ON
Entry
25.6 °C
Sensor check:
Temp. input:
Temp. value =
ON
Entry
25.6 °C
Temp
Flock
?
Request YES / NO
HELP
HOME
DATE
TIME
11
111
LANGUAG
DEFAULT SICHERN
Sensor check:
?
Configuration menu
Pool 1
Pool 1
Pool 1
M
DXMaM
RTD
POT
ORP 1 2 pH
K1
Sensor terminals
RTD: Pt1000/100
(pH)ORP: Redox sensor
POT1 free
POT2 free
pH(ORP): pH sensor
K2
M
DXMaM
K3
RTD
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1 Type: NO
Delay = 0000s
K2: Pause
K2 Type: NO
Delay = 0000s
K3: free
K3 Type: NO
POT
ORP 1 2 pH
Sensor terminals
RTD: Pt1000/100
(pH)ORP: Redox sensor
POT1 free
POT2 free
pH(ORP): pH sensor
101
M
DXMaM
K1
K2
RTD
K3
POT
ORP 1 2 pH
Sensor terminals
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1 Type: NO
Delay = 0000s
K2: Pause
K2 Type: NO
Delay = 0000s
K3: free
K3 Type: NO
RTD: Pt1000/100
(pH)ORP: Redox sensor
POT1 free
POT2 free
pH(ORP): pH sensor
K1
K2
K3
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1 Type: NO
Delay = 0000s
K2: Pause
K2 Type: NO
Delay = 0000s
K3: free
K3 Type: NO
101
DEFAULT SICHERN
DEFAULT SICHERN
?
A0134
Fig. 9: Structural principle of the of the operating menu
You can toggle over from the permanent display to the central
menu item. At this point the operating menu branches off into the
settings menus:
n Calibration, see Ä Chapter 8 ‘Calibration’ on page 88
n Parametric assignment, see Ä Chapter 9 ‘Assign parameters’
on page 120
n Configuration, see Ä Chapter 10 ‘Configure’ on page 148
79
Structure of the of the operating menu
7.2 Permanent display
pH
mV
mg/l Cl comb.
mg/l
7.12
Clfree
1.12
Cl total
1.25
Q
Redox
654
0.13
Calibrate sensor!
mg/l Temp
PT1000/100
ClO2-
1
10.00
Temp 4-20 mA
10.0 °C
°C
System 1
ERROR
Childrens pool
Dosage:
OFF
01.04.05
16:19:21
A0140
Fig. 10: The permanent display for all measured variables
The permanent display shows you all available measured values
from the sampled water on a system. In the event that a limit value
is exceeded (red) or undershot (blue), then a red or blue chevron is
shown next to the measured value and the measured value is
shown in the same colour.
In the event that a sensor-related fault occurs or the calibration is
faulty, then an error message appears in the corresponding meas‐
ured variable field. In the field at the bottom right-hand side, the
permanent display shows the system number, the date and time
and whether or not the metering system has been switched on or
off by means of the START/STOP key. ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’ .
By pressing F4 (GLOBAL), you can obtain an overview of all meas‐
ured values and the set points for all systems / pools, if numerous
systems / pools have been configured.
–
–
–
80
The DXCa calculates the displayed value for
bonded chlorine as the difference between the
measured values from the free chlorine and total
chlorine sensors.
Each measured variable is assigned a fixed colour
(e.g. pH = orange, redox = yellow, etc. )
You can toggle from any menu item back to the
operating menu by pressing the ESC key until the
preeminent display is shown.
Structure of the of the operating menu
7.3 Central menu item
System
1
7.12
pH
mg/l
Redox
Cl
free
1.12 mg/l
Cl comb.
0.92
Temp
PT 1000/100
1! Redox
HELP/SD
20. 0
CAL
mg/l
°C
Cl total
Set
6.00
Dosage:
OFF
Set
680
Dosage:
not active
Set
1.20
Dosage:
OFF
1.32
Q
mg/l
1
--> Value too low
PARAM CONFIG
QUIT
A0338
Fig. 11: The central menu item for all measured variables
The central menu item shows you the same data as the permanent
display. However, it can additionally show the set points, the
switching point for bonded chlorine or the temperature.
If a measured variable is controlled, then the coloured bars cover
the entire width of the display. If a measured variable is only being
displayed, then the coloured bars only cover half the width of the
display.
In the event that there is insufficient space on the display for all of
the measured variables, then you must subdivide them. This can
be achieved by classifying a set of measured variables and
assigning them to a second, virtual pool. These two pools will be
defined as subsystems and you can name them in the same way,
but, for example, with extensions to the names ‘_A’ and ‘_B’ in
order to tell them apart.
In contrast to the permanent display, the central menu point for the
individual measured variables on a system indicates whether the
metering system is set to ‘OFF’ or ‘ ON’ . Then it shows you the
value of the actuating variable. If you have set the metering system
to ‘OFF’ then it cannot be switched on by means of the START/
STOP key.
Underneath the field with the measured variables, the central menu
item shows you the fault messages. In the event that more than
one fault message is pending, then after acknowledging the alarm
via F5, the function ‘LIST is shown’ : When you press the F5 key, a
list of the errors appears. Here you have the option of toggling over
to an archive of previous fault messages with the F5 key
(ARCHIVE) if an SD card is available for storage. You can return to
the previous display by pressing the ESC key.
For each event, the following can be detailed:
n 1. Block: Number, date, time, COMES / GOES*
– * Designates whether the error occurred or disappeared at
this point in time
n 2. Block: Node-ID, system number
n 3. Block: Error message
On the SD card, this data is stored in file ‘eventlog.txt’ . This can be
read on a PC using a word processing application.
The central menu item braches off into the settings menus
n Calibration, see Ä Chapter 8 ‘Calibration’ on page 88
81
Structure of the of the operating menu
n Parametric assignment, see Ä Chapter 9 ‘Assign parameters’
on page 120
n Configuration, see Ä Chapter 10 ‘Configure’ on page 148
7.4 Log off SD card safely
Log off SD card safely
System
1
7.12
pH
mg/l
Redox
Cl
free
1.12 mg/l
Cl comb.
0.92
Temp
20. 0
1! Redox
HELP/SD
PT 1000/100
CAL
mg/l
°C
Cl total
Q
Set
6.00
Dosage:
OFF
Set
680
Dosage:
not active
Set
1.20
Dosage:
OFF
1.32
mg/l
1
--> Value too low
PARAM CONFIG
QUIT
A0338
Fig. 12: Log off SD card safely
1.
82
Press the F1 key from the central menu item ‘HELP/SD’
Structure of the of the operating menu
HELP:
CAL - calibration of sensors
PARAM - process parameter settings
CONFIG - terminal configuration
Info about DULCOMARIN:
DXCAW061MAPDDR
1404143403
Version: 1006
Software date: 31.02.2010 13.62.00
Service:
Company:
Specimen
Name:
Specimen
Landline:
6
Mobile:
8
HELP
OFF
Eject
SD CARD
HELP
VER.
SYSTEM
A0138
Fig. 13: Eject SD CARD
2.
Press the F2 button ‘Eject SD CARD’
Now you can remove the SD CARD!
A0339
Fig. 14: Remove SD CARD
ð Now you can safely remove the SD CARD.
7.5 Generally applicable states
The controller states are signalised as follows:
Display
Information
not active
If the parameter settings ‘Control’ are set to inactive
100,0 %
If the plant is set to ‘on’ and the parameter settings ‘Control’ are set to ‘active’ .
PAUSE
If relay ‘K2 ’ is connected
STOP
If the measured value and calibration are invalid
Q!
10.5 % interference value is active for the measured variable
Q min!
0.0 % for all controllers because Q < Qmin
ORP!
12.0 % only for chlorine
ECO
20.8 % for all controllers
83
Structure of the of the operating menu
The controller states are signalised as follows:
Display
Information
checkout time
Par. invalid!
If the parameter settings ‘Par’ are outside of the permissible range (e.g. Xp = 0)
The measured value states are signalised as follows:
Display
Display colour
Information
0,00
black
Normal measured value without
error
0,00
blue
Measured value is lower than the
lower limit value
0,00
red
Measured value is higher than the
upper limit value
--,--
black
< 0.10
Measurement error
black. red background
if the measured value is invalid
Reasons:
Measured water error (all meas‐
ured variables indicate incorrect
values)
Calibration is faulty
A correction value is invalid (e.g.
pH)
Calibrate sensor!
black
Calibration is faulty
Sensor not ready
black
Negative sensor power
pH correction value
black. red background
for the CLE sensor the value is >
8.5 pH; for all other sensors there
is an invalid pH value
System
1
7.12
pH
mg/l
Redox
Cl
free
1.12 mg/l
Cl comb.
0.92
Temp
20. 0
1! Redox
HELP/SD
PT 1000/100
mg/l
°C
Cl total
Q
Set
6.00
Dosage:
OFF
Set
680
Dosage:
not active
Set
1.20
Dosage:
OFF
1.32
mg/l
1
--> Value too low
CAL
PARAM CONFIG
QUIT
A0338
Fig. 15: Generally applicable states
Wide display bar
Measured value with control
Narrow display bar Measured value without control
84
Structure of the of the operating menu
7.6 Menus underneath the central menu item
Calibration menu
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration pH
Redox
Sensor value =
Zero point
=
Slope
=
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
pH 7.12
0.24 mV
59.23 mV/pH
CA1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
Q
ClO2
CAL2Pt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
HELP
CAL1Pt
CAL2Pt
A0135
Fig. 16: First menu item of the calibration menu
You can call up the calibration menu for all measured variable in
the central menu item via function key F2 (CAL).
Parametric assignment menu
MEAS
pH
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
CTRL
OUTP
ALARM
ECO
Measurement parameters
Sensor check:
Temp.input:
Temp. value =
ON
Entry
25.6 °C
Temp
Flock
HELP
HOME
DATE
TIME
LANGUAG
A0136
Fig. 17: First menu item of the parametric assignment menu
You can call up the parametric assignment menu in the central
menu item via function key F3 (PARAM).
The structure of the parametric assignment menu is similar to that
of a card file (with horizontal and vertical tabs):
n The vertical labelling forms the measured variables (pH,
Redox, etc.)
n The horizontal labels for the groups of parameters (such as
measurements, controls, etc)
85
Structure of the of the operating menu
Configuration menu
M
A
P
Cl
Cl
R
POT
ORP 1 2 pH
RTD
K1
K2
Sensor terminals
RTD: Pt1000/100
(pH)ORP: Redox sensor
POT1 : free
POT2 : free
pH(ORP): pH sensor
Soft. vers. 2903
I
P1
K3
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1 Type: NO
K2: Pause
K2 Type: NO
K3: free
K3 Type: NO
Serial no.
Node - ID
14
2004033100
1
HELP
OPTION
PASSW
UPDATE
BUS
A0137
Fig. 18: First menu item of the configuration menu
You can call up the configuration menu in the central menu item
via function key F4 (CONFIG).
The structure of the configuration menu reflects the configuration of
the existing hardware modules. There is a file card for each
module.
Example of a help display
HELP:
CAL - calibration of sensors
PARAM - process parameter settings
CONFIG - terminal configuration
Info about DULCOMARIN:
DXCAW061MAPDDR
1404143403
Version: 1006
Software date: 31.02.2010 13.62.00
Service:
Company:
Specimen
Name:
Specimen
Landline:
6
Mobile:
8
HELP
OFF
Eject
SD CARD
HELP
VER.
SYSTEM
A0138
Fig. 19: Example of a help display
You can call up the help menu in the central menu item via function
key F1 (HELP) when the F1 ‘ HELP’ key is available in the menu.
The help display called up from the central menu item additionally
indicates the software version of the central unit and the date of
manufacture. In the calibration menu you can choose to view or
hide mutual help texts in the file cards for all menu items of the cal‐
ibration menu via the F1 (help) key.
86
Structure of the of the operating menu
7.7 Submenus of the parametric assignment menu
MEAS
pH
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
CTRL
OUTP
ALARM
Measurement parameters
Sensor check:
Temp.input:
Temp. value =
ON
Entry
25.6 °C
HOME
DATE
Temp
Flock
HELP
1
TIME
2
LANGUAG
3
A0139
Fig. 20: Access to the submenus
1
2
3
Submenu DATE (F3)
Submenu TIME (F4)
Submenu LANGUAGE (F5)
The submenus DATE, TIME and LANGUAGE can be reached via
the function keys in the parametric assignment menu.
Switchover to summer time
The DXCa does not have a function to automatically
switch over to summer time.
87
Calibration
8
Calibration
NOTICE!
Operating instructions
Always observe the operating instructions and other
technical documentation for the installed sensors and
flow gauges when calibrating the equipment.
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration pH
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Q
ClO2
Sensor value =
Zero point
=
Slope
=
pH 7.12
0.24 mV
59.23 mV/pH
CA1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
CAL2Pt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
HELP
CAL1Pt
CAL2Pt
A0135
Fig. 21: Calibration menu
The DXCa sets the actuating outputs to ‘0’ . Exception
to this: When a basic load or a manual actuating vari‐
able has been set, this remains active during the cali‐
bration process. The mA standard signal outputs are
frozen. When calibration has been completed success‐
fully, all of the error checks relating to the reading are
restarted. The DXCa stores the recorded data for zero
point and slope.
Start calibration (for all measured variables):
n Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
n Press the F2 key (CAL) from the central menu item
n Enter the access code, see Ä Chapter 5.2 ‘Access code (pass‐
word)’ on page 70
n Select a card file with the desired measured variable (arrow
keys)
Support texts
You can choose to show or hide the support texts with
the F1 key (HELP).
88
Calibration
8.1 Calibration of pH measured variable
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration pH
Redox
Sensor value =
Zero point
=
Slope
=
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Q
ClO2
pH 7.12
0.24 mV
59.23 mV/pH
CA1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
CAL2Pt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
HELP
CAL1Pt
CAL2Pt
A0135
Fig. 22: Calibration of pH measured variable
Dispose of the used buffer solution
8.1.1 1-Point calibration pH
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration pH
Redox
Sensor value =
Zero point
=
Slope
=
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
pH 7.12
0.24 mV
59.23 mV/pH
CAL 1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
CAL2Pt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
10
HILFE
OFF
HOME
CAL 1Pt
KAL2Pkt
Spring 1
Spring 1
CAL
pH
pH
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
pH
pH 7.12
26.7 °C
7.00 pH
Buffer recognition runnin
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
A0142
PUFFER
CAL
pH
pH
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
pH 7.12
26.7 °C
7.00 pH
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
HILFE
OFF
Spring 1
CAL
CAL
HELP
OFF
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
pH 7.12
26.7 °C
7.00 pH
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
A0143
PUFFER
pH
CAL
HILFE
OFF
A0142
BUFFER
CAL
A0144
Fig. 23: 1-Point calibration pH
89
Calibration
1-Point calibration pH
The DXCa calibrates:
n the zero point if the buffer values lies between 6.8 and 7.5 pH
n the slope, if the buffer value is less than 6.8 pH or greater than
7.5 pH
1.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
2.
Unscrew the coaxial cable from the pH sensor
3.
Remove the pH sensor (measured water shut off?)
4.
Rinse the pH sensor with distilled water
5.
Carefully pad the pH sensor dry with a cloth (free of grease,
lint free)
6.
Screw the coaxial cable back onto the pH sensor
7.
Select 1-point calibration with F4 (CAL1Pt)
8.
Dip the Ph sensor in a buffer solution (e.g. pH 7) and stir
If you are measuring with an equipotential
bonding pin, then also dip this into the buffer sol‐
ution.
9.
Select the desired buffer temperature in the file card (arrow
keys) and press the ENTER key
10.
Enter the temperature of the buffer solution (arrow keys) and
press the ENTER key
11.
Press F4 (Buffer) (buffer detection)
ð The progress bar and ‘buffer recognition running’
appears on the display
12.
Press the ESC key in order to repeat the calibration process
13.
Press F5 (CAL) in order to conclude the calibration process
14.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display or central
menu item
15.
Unscrew the coaxial cable from the pH sensor
16.
Re-install the pH sensor into the flow gauge
17.
Screw the coaxial cable back onto the pH sensor
18.
Re-install the equipotential bonding pin
19.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
90
Calibration
8.1.2 2-Point calibration pH
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration pH
Redox
Sensor value =
Nullpunkt
=
Slope
=
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
pH 7.12
0.24 mV
59.23 mV/pH
CAL1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
CAL2Pt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
HELP
OFF
10
HOME
CAL1Pt
CAL2Pt
Spring 1
Spring 1
Spring 1
CAL
pH
Buffer 1
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
pH 4.57
26.7 °C
4.00 pH
Buffer 1
pH
pH
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
pH 4.57
26.7 °C
7.00 pH
Buffer recognition running
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
BUFFER
HELP
OFF
CAL
BUFFER
CAL
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
pH
pH
BUFFER
Buffer 2
pH
HELP
OFF
CAL
BUFFER
CAL
CAL
pH
BUFFER
CAL
Buffer 2
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
pH 7.12
26,7 °C
7.00 pH
Buffer recognition running
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
HELP
OFF
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
pH 7.12
26.7 °C
7.00 pH
pH 4.57
26.7 °C
4.00 pH
Quelle 1
CAL
CAL
Buffer 2
pH
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
Spring 1
Spring 1
pH
Buffer 1
Sensor value =
Buffer temp. =
Buffer value =
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
CAL
CAL
pH
pH
pH
pH 7.12
26.7 °C
7.00 pH
Clean probe and put in buffer
Start buffer recognition with BUFFER key
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
BUFFER
CAL
A0145
Fig. 24: 2-Point calibration pH
2-Point calibration pH
1.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
2.
Unscrew the coaxial cable from the pH sensor
3.
Remove the pH sensor (measured water shut off?)
4.
Rinse the pH sensor with distilled water
5.
Carefully pad the pH sensor dry with a cloth (free of grease,
lint free)
6.
Screw the coaxial cable back onto the pH sensor
7.
Select 2-point calibration with F5 (CAL2Pt)
8.
Dip the Ph sensor in a buffer solution (e.g. pH 7) and stir
If you are measuring with an equipotential
bonding pin, then also dip this into the buffer sol‐
ution.
9.
Select the desired buffer temperature (arrow keys) in the file
card (buffer 1) and press the ENTER key
10.
Enter the temperature of the buffer solution (arrow keys) and
press the ENTER key
91
Calibration
11.
Press F4 (Buffer) (buffer detection)
ð The progress bar and ‘buffer recognition running’
appears on the display
The DXCa has detected and stored the value of the
buffer solution pH 7 (buffer 1)
12.
Press the ESC key in order to repeat the calibration process
13.
Press the F5 key (CAL) in order to continue with calibration
14.
Take the pH sensor out of the buffer pH7 (buffer 1) and rinse
it with distilled water
15.
Carefully pad the pH sensor dry with a cloth (free of grease,
lint free)
16.
Dip the Ph sensor in the buffer solution pH 4 (buffer 2) and
stir
If you are measuring with an equipotential
bonding pin, then also dip this into the buffer sol‐
ution.
17.
Select the desired buffer temperature (arrow keys) in the cur‐
rently displayed file card (buffer 2) and press the ENTER key
18.
Enter the temperature of the buffer solution (arrow keys) and
press the ENTER key
19.
Press F4 (Buffer) (buffer detection)
ð The progress bar and ‘buffer recognition running’
appears on the display
The DXCa has detected and stored the value of the
buffer solution pH 4 (buffer 2)
20.
Press the ESC key in order to repeat calibration
21.
Press F5 (CAL) in order to conclude the calibration process
and store the values.
ð If calibration is successful, the following appears briefly:
‘Calibration OK’ .
22.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display or central
menu item
23.
Unscrew the coaxial cable from the pH sensor
24.
Re-install the pH sensor into the flow gauge
25.
Screw the coaxial cable back onto the pH sensor
26.
Re-install the equipotential bonding pin
27.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
92
Calibration
8.2 Redox measured variable
Check redox sensor
You cannot calibrate a redox sensor. A redox sensor
can only be tested. If the value of the redox sensor
deviates more than ± 50 mV from the value of the
buffer solution, then the redox sensor is to be tested as
described in its operating instructions and replaced if
necessary.
CAL
pH
Sensor check
Redox
Cl free
Sensor value =
459 mV
Cl tot
Set value =
465 mV
Temp
The value can only be adjusted within a range
of ± 50 mV
CAL
A0146
Fig. 25: Redox measured variable
You can only compare deviations between the redox
sensor and buffer solution within a bandwidth of ± 50
mV.
In the event that the displayed value deviates by more
than ± 50 mV from the mV-value of the buffer solution,
then the buffer solution and redox sensor should be
checked and replaced if necessary.
Dispose of the used buffer solution
1.
Select the file card [Redox ](arrow keys) and press the CAL
button (F5)
2.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
3.
Unscrew the coaxial cable from the redox sensor
4.
Remove the redox sensor (measured water shut off?)
5.
Rinse the redox sensor with distilled water
6.
Carefully pad the redox sensor dry with a cloth (free of
grease, lint free)
7.
Screw the coaxial cable back onto the redox sensor
8.
Dip the redox sensor in a buffer solution (e.g. with 465 mV).
If you are measuring with an equipotential
bonding pin, then also dip this into the buffer sol‐
ution.
93
Calibration
9.
If the displayed value is stable, compare it with the specified
mV value detailed on the buffer solution bottle - it may not
vary more than ± 50 mV from the buffer value
10.
Press the ENTER button
11.
Adjust the set value with the arrow keys. You can only com‐
pare deviations between the redox sensor and buffer solution
within a bandwidth of ± 50 mV.
12.
Press the ENTER button
13.
Press the F5 key (ACCEPT)
14.
If you do not want to carry out any more tests, press the ESC
key to return to the permanent display or central menu item
15.
Unscrew the coaxial cable from the redox sensor
16.
Re-install the redox sensor into the flow gauge
17.
Screw the coaxial cable back onto the redox sensor
18.
Re-install the equipotential bonding pin
19.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
8.3 Calibrate measured variable "chlorine free"
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
Sensor value =
1,12 mg/l
Slope =
110,43 %
Calibration : DPD <photometer>
Temp
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
30
HOME
CAL
A0147
Fig. 26: Calibrate measured variable "chlorine free"
94
Calibration
Calibrate zero point for measured var‐
iable "chlorine free"
CAUTION!
– Please also observe the operating instructions for
the sensor and flow gauge
– You may only set up a chlorine differential meas‐
urement in combination with a calibrated pH
sensor
– If you calibrated with pH correction, then you may
only measure with pH correction! If you calibrated
without pH correction, then you may only measure
without pH correction
– Following the replacement of a sensor membrane
cap or electrolyte, the slope has to be calibrated
– The slope has to be calibrated at regular intervals
to ensure the optimal operation of the sensor. Cali‐
brating the sensor every 3-4 weeks suffices with
swimming pool or potable water
– Avoid air bubbles in the measured water. Air bub‐
bles, which adhere to the membrane of the sensor,
can result in too low a reading and thus lead to
over-metering.
– Please note the applicable national guidelines for
calibration intervals
Prerequisites
n Constant flow on flow gauge - minimum 40 l/h
n The sensor have been run-in
CAL
CAL
pH
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Cl free
Sensor value =
1.12 mg/l
Slope =
110.43 %
Zero point =
0.00 pA
Calibration : DPD <photometer>
Cl tot
Temp
30
CAL DPD
Sensor calibration
Redox
Sensor value =
0.00 mg/l
Slope =
110.43 %
Zero point =
0.00 pA
Calibration : DPD <photometer>
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Calibration
Zero point
Sensor value =
Zero point =
Slope =
Calibration : Zero point
0.00 mg/l
10.00 pA
110.43 %
Immerse sensor in chlorine free water
Wait until value has stabilised at approx. 0 mg/l
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
CAL
Zero point
CAL
Zero point Calibration
INFO
Sensor calibration
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Temp. value =
0.00 mg/l
10 pA
25.6 °C
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero point =
0.00 mg/l
142.26 %
10.00 pA
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Calibration started. the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
Calibration completed
CAL
HOME
Sensor value =
Zero point =
Slope =
Calibration : Zero point
0.00 mg/l
10.00 pA
142.26 %
Immerse sensor in chlorine free water
Wait until value has stabilised at approx. 0 mg/l
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
CAL
Zero point
ESC
Central
menu item
A0148
Fig. 27: Calibrate zero point for "chlorine free"
95
Calibration
–
–
The sensor have been run-in
Only carry out a zero point calibration if:
– you are using the sensor in the lower limit of
the measuring range
– you want to measure bonded chlorine (chlorine
differential measurement)
1.
Select the file card ‘Cl free’ - ‘Calibrate sensor’ (arrow keys)
and press the ENTER button
2.
Select the ‘Zero point’ (arrow keys) and press the ENTER
button
3.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
ð - First inlet, then the outlet.
4.
Dismantle the sensor
ð Unscrew the CAN cable from the CLE sensor.
5.
Rinse the sensor with chlorine free water
Examine the tap water for chlorine with an appropriate
sampling instrument
6.
Dip the CLE sensor in a bucket of clean, chlorine free tap
water (or in still mineral water or distilled water)
ð The chlorine free water must be the same temperature as
the sample water.
7.
Stir with the sensor until the measured value of the sensor is
stable and near zero for approx. 5 mins.
8.
Press F4 (CAL zero point) in order to conclude the calibration
process and store the values
ð Enter the access codes as prompted.
9.
Conclude calibration with the F5 key (CAL)
ð Display: [zero point calibration completed]
10.
Press F2 (HOME)
ð Zero point calibration is completed.
11.
You can now exit the menu with the ESC button
12.
Re-install the sensor into the flow gauge
13.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
14.
15.
96
Before calibrating the slope, wait until the measured value is
constant (minimum 15 mins)
CAUTION!
Now it is imperative to calibrate the ‘slope’
Calibration
Calibrate slope for measured variable
"chlorine free"
Cl tot
Temp
DPD Calibration
DPD Calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
CAL
CAL
CAL
pH
Cl free
Sensor value =
0.96 mg/l
Slope =
110.43 %
Zero point =
10.00 pA
Calibration : DPD <photometer>
1.01 mg/l
1.11 mg/l
27.4 °C
Cl free
CAL DPD
HELP
OFF
DEFAULT
INFO
MESS
KAL
DPD value :
Sensor value =
Temp. Value =
1.01 mg/l
1.01 mg/l
27.4 °C
Measure chlorine concentration with photometer
Enter value and push CAL key
Calibration started, the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
Measure chlorine concentration with photometer
Enter value and push CAL key
Calibration started, the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
DPD value :
Sensor value =
Temp. Value =
DPD VALUE =
01.01 mg/l
Rng:
0.01 .. 10.00 mg/l
CAL
Cl free
DPD value :
Sensor value =
Temp. Value =
1.30 mg/l
0.90 mg/l
27.4 °C
DEFAULT
INFO
MEAS
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Measure chlorine concentration with photometer
Enter value and push CAL key
Calibration started, the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
HELP
OFF
INFO
Sensor calibration
DPD Calibration
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero point =
1.01 mg/l
132.71 %
10.00 pA
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Sensor value =
1.01 mg/l
Slope =
132.71 %
Zero point =
10.00 pA
Calibration : DPD <photometer>
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
Calibration completed
HELP
OFF
HOME
CAL
CAL
ESC
Central
menu item
A0149
Fig. 28: Calibrate slope "chlorine free"
CAUTION!
Chlorine must be permanently present in the sample
water (approx 0.5 mg/l). Otherwise the measuring
system cannot calibrate.
1.
Select the file card [Cl free] [Sensor calibration] (arrow keys)
and press the ENTER button
2.
Select [DPD (photometer)] (arrow keys) and press the
ENTER button
3.
If the [Sensor value] is stable, press F5 (CAL DPD)
4.
Immediately afterwards, take a water sample from the flow
gauge
5.
Immediately afterwards, determine the chlorine content of the
sample water with a photometer and a suitable sampling
instrument (e.g. DPD 1 for free chlorine (CLE sensor CLE))
6.
Press the ENTER button
7.
Enter the chlorine content (arrow keys) and press the ENTER
key
8.
Press F5 (CAL) in order to conclude the calibration process
ð The following appears [Calibration completed].
9.
Press the F2 key (HOME) in order to return to the calibration
menu screen
10.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display
97
Calibration
If you also want to measure the total chlorine, then calibrate this
measured variable with the same sample (see Ä Chapter 8.4 ‘Cali‐
brate measured variable "Total chlorine"’ on page 99).
Repeat the calibration after one day.
You can display the pH value, the sensor current and
the temperature at the time of pressing the button with
F4 (MESS).
–
In the event that an error message is shown when
calibrating a chlorine sensor, you can call up
detailed information with F3 INFO. This data will
also help when discussing the matter with a tech‐
nical consultant.
In the event that the DXCa indicates an excessively low measured
value or cannot be calibrated after the sensor has been run in (for
CLE 3.1 and CTE/CGE approx. 2-6 h, for CLE 3 approx. 2 h) (in
the sample water there must be approx. 1 mg/l of free chlorine, the
pH-value 7.2 and the sample water and circulation pumps must be
running), then the run-in times should be doubled and extended
into the following day.
If the sensor still cannot not be calibrated, then please phone
ProMinent customer service. Please have the following data ready:
n DPD1-value (free chlorine)
n DPD 1 + 3-value (total chlorine)
n Primary sensor current in pA (via F4 MESS in calibration menu
for slope)
n pH value
n Redox value (if redox measurement is available)
n Volume of sample water in cubic metres
Set the CLE sensor for free chlorine
to "DEFAULT" values
1.
Select the file card [Cl free] [Sensor calibration] (arrow keys)
and press the F5 button (CAL DPD)
2.
Press the F2 key (DEFAULT) key, see Fig. 29
ð The zero point is now set to 0 pA and the slope at 100%.
All previous calibrated values will now have been over‐
written
3.
Now you must re-calibrate the measured variable ‘chlorine
free’ , see Fig. 30
ð In order to do so, press the ESC button.
4.
98
Press the F5 key (CAL)
Calibration
CAL
DPD Calibration
▶DPD value =
Cl free
Sensor value =
Temp.value =
1.00 mg/l
1.00 mg/l
25.0 °C
Calibration started, the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
HELP
DEFAULT INFO
MEAS
CAL
A0335
Fig. 29: [DEFAULT] .
Warning:
Calibrate sensor
ESC Key - Return to the menu
A0336
Fig. 30: Press the ESC button
8.4 Calibrate measured variable "Total chlorine"
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Sensor value =
1.12 mg/l
Slope =
110.43 %
Zero point =
0.00 pA
Calibration : DPD <photometer>
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
CAL DPD
A0150
Fig. 31: Calibrate measured variable "Total chlorine"
99
Calibration
Calibrate zero point for measured var‐
iable "total chlorine"
CAUTION!
– Here you calibrate the CTE sensor for total
chlorine
– The DXCa calculates the displayed value for
bonded chlorine as the difference between the
measured values from the free chlorine and total
chlorine sensors.
– The sensor for ‘Free chlorine’ must be a CLE 3.1
sensor for the chlorine differential measurement
– Please also observe the operating instructions for
the sensor and flow gauge
– You may only set up a chlorine differential meas‐
urement in combination with a calibrated pH
sensor
– If you calibrated with pH correction, then you may
only measure with pH correction! If you calibrated
without pH correction, then you may only measure
without pH correction
– Following the replacement of a sensor membrane
cap or electrolyte, the slope has to be calibrated
– The slope has to be calibrated at regular intervals
to ensure the optimal operation of the sensor. Cali‐
brating the sensor every 3-4 weeks suffices with
swimming pool or potable water
– Avoid air bubbles in the measured water. Air bub‐
bles, which adhere to the membrane of the sensor,
can result in too low a reading and thus lead to
over-metering.
– Please note the applicable national guidelines for
calibration intervals
Prerequisites
n Constant flow on flow gauge - minimum 40 l/h
n The sensor have been run-in
n A CLE 3.1 sensor for free chlorine must be available in the
system (pools, filtration circuit, etc.)
100
Calibration
CAL
CAL
pH
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Sensor value =
0.00 mg/l
Slope =
145.06 %
Zero point =
0.00 pA
Calibration : DPD <photometer>
Cl tot
Temp
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
30
CAL DPD
Sensor calibration
Redox
Sensor value =
0.00 mg/l
Slope =
145.06 %
Zero point =
0.00 pA
Calibration : DPD <photometer>
Cl free
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Calibration
Zero point
Sensor value =
Zero point =
Slope =
Calibration : Zero point
0.00 mg/l
0.00 pA
145.06 %
Immerse sensor in chlorine free water
Wait until value has stabilised at approx. 0 mg/l
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
CAL
Zero point
CAL
Cl tot
Zero point calibration
INFO
Sensor calibration
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
0.00 mg/l
100 pA
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero point =
0.00 mg/l
142.26 %
0.00 pA
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
Calibration started. the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
Calibration completed
OFF
Sensor value =
Zero point =
Slope =
Calibration : Zero point
Immerse sensor in chlorine free water
Wait until value has stabilised at approx. 0 mg/l
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
HOME
0.00 mg/l
0.00 pA
142.26 %
CAL
Zero point
ESC
Central
menu item
A0151
Fig. 32: Calibrate zero point for "Total chlorine"
–
–
The sensor have been run-in
Only carry out a zero point calibration if:
– you are using the sensor in the lower limit of
the measuring range
– you want to measure bonded chlorine (chlorine
differential measurement)
1.
Select the file card ‘Cl comb’ - ‘Calibrate sensor’ (arrow
keys) and press the ENTER button
2.
Select the ‘Zero point’ (arrow keys) and press the ENTER
button
3.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
ð - First inlet, then the outlet.
4.
Dismantle the sensor
ð Do not unscrew the CAN cable from the CTE sensor.
5.
Rinse the sensor with chlorine free water
Examine the tap water for chlorine with an appropriate
sampling instrument
6.
Dip the CTE sensor in a bucket of clean, chlorine free tap
water (or in still mineral water or distilled water)
ð The chlorine free water must be the same temperature as
the sample water.
7.
Stir with the sensor until the measured value of the sensor is
stable and near zero for approx. 5 mins.
101
Calibration
8.
Press F4 (CAL zero point) in order to conclude the calibration
process and store the values
ð Enter the access codes as prompted.
9.
Conclude calibration with the F5 key (CAL)
ð Display: [zero point calibration completed]
10.
Re-install the sensor into the flow gauge
11.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
12.
Before calibrating the slope, wait until the measured value is
constant (minimum 15 mins)
13.
CAUTION!
Now it is imperative to calibrate the ‘slope’
Calibrate slope for measured variable
"total chlorine"
CAL
CAL
pH
Cl tot
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
Temp
DPD value:
Sensor value =
Temp. Value =
Sensor value =
1.65 mg/l
Slope =
160.43 %
Zero point =
10.00 pA
Calibration: DPD <photometer>
Cl tot
CAL DPD
HELP
OFF
DEFAULT
DPD value:
Sensor value =
Temp. Value =
1.01 mg/l
1.65 mg/l
27.4 °C
INFO
MEAS
CAL
DPD-Calibration
CAL
1.01 mg/l
1.01 mg/l
27.4 °C
Measure chlorine concentration with photometer
nter value and push CAL key
Calibration started, the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
DPD VALUE =
01.01 mg/l
Rng:
0.01 .. 10.00 mg/l
CAL
1.30 mg/l
0.90 mg/l
27.4 °C
INFO
MEAS
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Measure chlorine concentration with photometer
nter value and push CAL key
Calibration started, the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
DEFAULT
INFO
Sensor calibration
DPD-Calibration
DPD value:
Sensor value =
Temp. Value =
HELP
OFF
Cl tot
Measure chlorine concentration with photometer
nter value and push CAL key
Calibration started, the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
DPD-Calibration
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero point =
1.70 mg/l
232.71 %
10.00 pA
Cl free
Cltot
Temp
Sensor value =
1.01 mg/l
Slope =
132.71 %
Zero point =
10.00 pA
Calibration: DPD <photometer>
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
Calibration completed
HOME
CAL
HELP
OFF
CAL DPD
ESC
Central
menu item
A0152
Fig. 33: Calibrate slope for "total chlorine"
CAUTION!
Chlorine must be permanently present in the sample
water (approx 0.5 mg/l). Otherwise the measuring
system cannot calibrate.
102
1.
Select the file card [Cl comb] [Sensor calibration] (arrow
keys) and press the ENTER button
2.
Select [DPD (photometer)] (arrow keys) and press the
ENTER button
Calibration
3.
If the [Sensor value] is stable, press F5 (CAL DPD)
4.
Immediately afterwards, take a water sample from the flow
gauge
5.
Immediately afterwards, determine the chlorine content of the
sample water with a photometer and a suitable sampling
instrument (e.g. DPD 1 + 3 for total chlorine (CTE sensor))
6.
Press the ENTER button
7.
Enter the chlorine content (arrow keys) and press the ENTER
key
8.
Press F5 (CAL) in order to conclude the calibration process
ð The following appears [Calibration completed].
9.
Press the F2 key (HOME) in order to return to the calibration
menu screen
10.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display
Repeat the calibration after one day.
You can display the pH value, the sensor current and
the temperature at the time of pressing the button with
F4 (MESS).
–
Set the CTE sensor for total chlorine
to "DEFAULT" values
In the event that an error message is shown when
calibrating a chlorine sensor, you can call up
detailed information with F3 INFO. This data will
also help when discussing the matter with a tech‐
nical consultant.
1.
Select the file card [Clges] [Sensor calibration] (arrow keys)
and press the F5 button (CAL DPD)
2.
Press the F2 key (DEFAULT) key, see Fig. 34
ð The zero point is now set to 0 pA and the slope at 100%.
All previous calibrated values will now have been over‐
written
3.
Now you must re-calibrate the measured variable ‘chlorine
free’ , see Fig. 35
ð In order to do so, press the ESC button.
4.
Press the F5 key (CAL)
103
Calibration
CAL
Cl tot
DPD Calibration
▶DPD value =
Sensor value =
Temp.value =
1.00 mg/l
1.00 mg/l
25.0 °C
Calibration started, the calibration
is finished with CAL!
ESC cancels the calibration!
HELP
DEFAULT INFO
MEAS
CAL
A0337
Fig. 34: [DEFAULT] .
Warning:
Calibrate sensor
ESC Key - Return to the menu
A0336
Fig. 35: Press the ESC button
104
Calibration
8.5 Calibrate measured variable for fluoride (F-)
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Fluor.
Redox
Temp
F
Sensor value =
Slope =
1.25 mg/l
59.20 mV/dec
Cal1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
Cal2Pt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
HELP
OFF
HOME
CAL1Pt
CAL2Pt
A0153
Fig. 36: Calibrate measured variable for fluoride (F-)
1-Point calibration (via photometer)
CAUTION!
– Please also observe the operating instructions for
the sensor and flow gauges, etc.
– The sensor must be checked at regular intervals to
ensure optimal operation of the sensor and re-cali‐
brated if necessary
– Avoid air bubbles in the measured water. Air bub‐
bles, which adhere to the membrane of the sensor,
can result in too low a reading and thus lead to
over-metering.
– A 2-point calibration must be carried out during the
initial commissioning process
– Please note the applicable national guidelines for
calibration intervals
Prerequisites
n The sensor must be run-in (min. 1 h)
105
Calibration
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Fluor.
Redox
Temp
F
Sensor value =
Slope =
1.12 mg/l
59.20 mV/dec
CAL1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
CalPt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
HELP
OFF
Home
CAL1Pt:
CAL2Pt:
CAL
F
CAL
F
Fluor.
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
0.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
1.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
Fluor.
CAL
F
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
1.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
1.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
Calibration value
01.00 mg/l
Range
0.00 ... 99.99 mg/l
0.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
1.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
CAL
Fluor.
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0154
Fig. 37: 1-Point calibration (via photometer)
106
1.
Take a water sample from the sampling cock for purposes of
calibration
2.
Measure the water sample in accordance with the photo‐
meter manufacturer's instructions
3.
Subsequently switch directly to the calibration menu with F2
CAL
4.
Select the file card "F-" (arrow keys) and press F4 CAL 1Pt
5.
Select [Temp.value ] (arrow keys), in the event that the tem‐
perature of the water is incorrect, and press the ENTER
button
6.
Enter the current measured temperature of the water (arrow
keys) and press the ENTER key
7.
Select the [ Calibration value] (arrow keys) and press the
ENTER button
8.
Enter the measured fluoride concentration ascertained by the
photometer (arrow keys) and press the ENTER key
9.
Then press the F5 key (CAL)
10.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display
Calibration
2-Point calibration (via photometer)
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Fluor.
Redox
Temp
F
Sensor value =
Slope =
1.12 mg/l
59.20 mV/dec
CAL1Pt: Calibration with reference value
or buffer solution
CalPt: Calibration with 2 buffer solutions
HELP
OFF
Home
CAL1Pt:
CAL2Pt:
CAL
F
Buffer 1
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
Fluor.
CAL
F
0.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
1.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
Buffer 1
Fluor.
Kalibrierwert
00.00 mg/l
Bereich
Buffer 2
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
Fluor.
0.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
1.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
HELP
OFF
CAL
Buffer 2
Fluor.
Calibration value
01.00 mg/l
Bereich
Buffer 2
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
1.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
1.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
0.00 ... 99.99 mg/l
CAL
CAL
F
Fluor.
0.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
1.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
CAL
0.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
0.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
HELP
OFF
0.00 ... 99.99 mg/l
F
Fluor.
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
Clean probe and put in buffer
Adjust buffer temperature and value
Push CAL key
CAL
Buffer 1
Sensor value =
Sensor current =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
1.00 mg/l
0.000 mA
1.00 mg/l
50.0 °C
CAL
F
CAL
F
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0155
Fig. 38: 2-Point calibration (via photometer)
8.6 Calibrate measured variable for chlorine dioxide (CIO2).
Calibrating at a higher temperature
As chlorine dioxide in the sample water is only physi‐
cally dissolved, unlike chlorine, it gasses out of the
sample water very quickly at high temperatures (> 30
°C). It is therefore essential that the DPD measure‐
ments are performed quickly. There should on no
account be more than 1 minute between taking the
sample and mixing it with the reagents. In this case
you must generate the red dye by the addition of the
reagent directly at the sampling point and then the
measurement should be conducted in the laboratory
as quickly as possible.
In the event that the DXCa indicates an excessively
low measured value or cannot be calibrated after the
sensor has been run in (for CDE approx. 2 - 6 hrs)
then the run-in times should be doubled and extended
into the following day.
If the sensor still cannot not be calibrated, then please
phone ProMinent customer service.
107
Calibration
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
4,8 mg/l
4,008 mA
0,004 mA
ClO2
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0156
Fig. 39: Calibrate measured variable for chlorine dioxide (CIO2).
Measured variable chlorine dioxide
(CIO2).
CAUTION!
– Please also observe the operating instructions for
the sensor and flow gauge
– Following the replacement of a sensor membrane
cap or electrolyte, the slope has to be calibrated
– Avoid air bubbles in the measured water. Air bub‐
bles, which adhere to the membrane of the sensor,
can result in too low a reading and thus lead to
over-metering.
– The slope has to be re-calibrated at regular inter‐
vals to ensure the optimal operation of the sensor.
– Please note the applicable national guidelines for
calibration intervals
Prerequisites
n Constant flow on flow gauge - minimum 20 l/h
n Constant temperature of the sample water
n Identical temperature of sample water and sensor (wait approx.
15 minutes)
n The sensor have been run-in
108
Calibration
CAL
pH
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
ClO2
ClO2
Sensor current =
ClO2
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
CAL
CAL
Sensor calibration
0.003 mA
1.12 mg/l
32.0 °C
Sensor current =
4.030 mA
ero point calibration
Push CAL key
Wert eingeben und KAL drücken
CAL
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
CAL
Calibration value =
0.000 mg/l
Bereich: 0.000...9.999 mg/l
CAL
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
ClO2
Calibration value =
Temp. value:
0.0 mg/l
32.0 °C
Cl free
Sensor current =
0.003 mA
ClO2
Temp
ero point calibration
Push CAL key
Sensor value =
Slope
Zero value =
4.6 mg/l
4.006 mA
0.004 mA
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
CAL
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0157
Fig. 40: Chlorine dioxide (CIO2).
CAUTION!
– The sensor have been run-in
– Only carry out a zero point calibration if:
– you are using the sensor in the lower limit of
the measuring range
– Use the 0.5 ppm variant
1.
Select the file card "CIO2“ - ‘Calibrate sensor’ (arrow keys)
F5 CAL and press the ENTER button
2.
Under [DPD value] enter the value 0.00 mg/l and press the
ENTER-key - the following is now shown on the file card
[Zero point calibration]
3.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
ð - First inlet, then the outlet.
4.
Dismantle the sensor
5.
Rinse the sensor with chlorine free water
6.
Dip the CDE sensor in a container of still mineral water or
distilled water. The water must be the same temperature as
the sample water.
7.
Stir with the sensor until the measured value of the sensor is
stable and near zero for approx. 5 mins.
8.
Then press the F5 key (CAL)
9.
Re-install the sensor into the flow gauge
10.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
109
Calibration
CAUTION!
Now it is imperative to calibrate the ‘slope’
Measured variable chlorine dioxide
(CIO2).
CAL
pH
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
ClO2
ClO2
Sensor current =
ClO2
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
CAL
CAL
Sensor calibration
4.030 mA
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
1.80 mg/l
32.0 °C
Sensor current =
4.030 mA
Zero point calib.
Push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
CAL
CAL
Calibration value =
1.800 mg/l
Range: 0.000...9.999 mg/l
CAL
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
ClO2
Calibration value =
Temp. Value =
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
Cl free
Sensor current =
4.003 mA
ClO2
Temp
Zero point calib.
Push CAL key
Sensor value =
Slope
Zero value =
4.6 mg/l
4.006 mA
0.004 mA
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
CAL
HELP
OFF
CAL
ESC
Central
menu item
A0158
Fig. 41: Chlorine dioxide (CIO2).
CAUTION!
– Before calibrating the slope, wait until the meas‐
ured value is constant (wait minimum 15 mins.)
– Chlorine dioxide must be permanently present in
the sample water (approx 0.5 mg/l).
– Otherwise the measuring system cannot cali‐
brate.
– Check the calibration 24 hrs after initial commis‐
sioning by means of DPD
110
1.
Select the file card "CIO2“ - ‘Calibrate sensor’ off (arrow
keys)
2.
If the [Sensor value] is stable, press F5 (CAL DPD)
3.
Immediately afterwards, take a water sample from the flow
gauge
4.
Immediately afterwards, determine the chlorine dioxide con‐
tent of the sample water with a photometer and a suitable
sampling instrument (e.g. DPD)
5.
Enter the chlorine dioxide content (arrow keys) and press F5
CAL
6.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display
Calibration
8.7 Calibrate measured variable hydrogen peroxide (H2O2).
Calibrate measured variable hydrogen
peroxide (H2O2).
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
H2O2
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0159
Fig. 42: Calibrate measured variable hydrogen peroxide (H2O2).
CAUTION!
– Please also observe the operating instructions for
the sensor and flow gauge
– Following the replacement of a sensor membrane
cap or electrolyte, the slope has to be calibrated
– The slope has to be re-calibrated at regular inter‐
vals to ensure the optimal operation of the sensor.
– Please note the applicable national guidelines for
calibration intervals
Prerequisites
n The H2O2-concentration of the sample water is simultaneously
sufficiently constant (observe the response time of the sensor
over 8 mins)
n Constant, permissible flow rate at the flow gauge
n Identical temperature of sample water and sensor (wait approx.
15 minutes)
n The sensor have been run-in
111
Calibration
CAL
pH
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
H2O2
H2O2
Sensor current =
H2O2
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
CAL
CAL
Sensor calibration
4.030 mA
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
1.80 mg/l
32.0 °C
Sensor current =
4.030 mA
Zero point calibration
Push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
CAL
CAL
Calibration value =
0.000 mg/l
Range: 0.000...9.999 mg/l
CAL
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
H2O2
Calibration value =
Temp. value:
0.0 mg/l
32.0 °C
Cl free
Sensor current =
0.003 mA
H2O2
Temp
Zero point calibration
Push CAL key
Sensor value =
Slope
Zero value =
4.6 mg/l
4.006 mA
0.004 mA
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
CAL
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0160
Fig. 43: Calibrate zero point
CAUTION!
– The sensor have been run-in
– Only carry out a zero point calibration if:
– you are using the sensor in the lower limit of
the measuring range
1.
Select the file card "H2O2“ [Sensor calibration] (arrow keys),
F5 CAL and press the ENTER button
2.
Under [DPD value] enter the value 0.00 mg/l and press the
ENTER-key - the following is now shown on the file card
[Zero point calibration]
3.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
ð - First inlet, then the outlet.
4.
Dismantle the sensor
5.
Rinse the sensor with H2O2-free water
6.
Dip the PER sensor in a container of still mineral water or
distilled water. The water must be the same temperature as
the sample water.
7.
Stir with the sensor until the measured value of the sensor is
stable and near zero for approx. 5 mins.
8.
Then press the F5 key (CAL)
9.
Re-install the sensor into the flow gauge
10.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
112
Calibration
CAUTION!
Now it is imperative to calibrate the ‘slope’
Calibrate measured variable hydrogen
peroxide (H2O2).
CAL
pH
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
CAL
CAL
Sensor calibration
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
H2O2
Sensor current =
H2O2
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
H2O2
4.030 mA
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
1.80 mg/l
32.0 °C
Sensor current =
4.030 mA
Zero point calibration
Push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
CAL
CAL
Calibration value =
1.800 mg/l
Range: 0.000...9.999 mg/l
CAL
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
H2O2
Calibration value =
Temp. value:
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
Cl free
Sensor current =
4.003 mA
H2O2
Temp
Zero point calibration
Push CAL key
Sensor value =
Slope
Zero value =
4.6 mg/l
4.006 mA
0.004 mA
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
CAL
HELP
OFF
CAL
ESC
Central
menu item
A0161
Fig. 44: Calibrate slope
CAUTION!
– Before calibrating the slope, wait until the meas‐
ured value is constant (wait minimum 15 mins.)
– Check the calibration 24 hrs after initial commis‐
sioning by means of DPD
– Repeat calibration if the H2O2-concentration varies
by more than 15 % from the reference value
1.
Select the file card "H2O2“ [Sensor calibration] off (arrow
keys)
2.
If the [Sensor value] is stable, press F5
3.
Immediately afterwards, take a water sample from the flow
gauge
4.
Immediately afterwards determine the H2O2-content of the
sample water with a photometer and a suitable sampling
instrument (e.g. DPD)
5.
Enter the H2O2-content (arrow keys) and press F5 CAL
6.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display
113
Calibration
In the event that the DXCa indicates an excessively low measured
value or cannot be calibrated after the sensor has been run in (for
H2O2 approx . 6-12 h) then the run-in times should be doubled and
extended into the following day.
If the sensor still cannot not be calibrated, then please phone
ProMinent customer service.
8.8 Measured variable chlorite (CIO2 -)
Measured variable chlorite (CIO2 -)
zero point calibration
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
ClO2Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0162
Fig. 45: Calibrate measured variable chlorite (CIO2 -)
CAUTION!
– Please also observe the operating instructions for
the sensor and flow gauge
– Following the replacement of a sensor membrane
cap or electrolyte, the slope has to be calibrated
– Avoid air bubbles in the measured water. Air bub‐
bles, which adhere to the membrane of the sensor,
can result in too low a reading and thus lead to
over-metering.
– The slope has to be re-calibrated at regular inter‐
vals to ensure the optimal operation of the sensor.
– Please note the applicable national guidelines for
calibration intervals
Prerequisites
n Constant flow on flow gauge - minimum 20 l/h
n Constant temperature of the sample water
n Identical temperature of sample water and sensor (wait approx.
15 minutes)
n The sensor have been run-in
n There is a constant pH value in the permitted range (pH 6.5 9.5)
114
Calibration
CAL
pH
Temp
ClO2-
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value=
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
Calibration value =
0.000 mg/l
Sensor current =
0.000 mA
ClO2-
ClO2Sensor current =
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
CAL
CAL
Sensor calibration
4.030 mA
Zero point calibration
Push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
CAL
CAL
Calibration value =
0.000 mg/l
Range: 0.000...9.999 mg/l
CAL
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
ClO2-
Calibration value =
Temp. value:
Sensor current =
Cl free
0.0 mg/l
32.0 °C
Temp
ClO2-
0.003 mA
Zero point calibration
Push CAL key
Sensor value =
Slope
Zero value=
4.6 mg/l
4.006 mA
0.004 mA
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
CAL
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0163
Fig. 46: Chlorite (ClO2 -) zero point calibration
CAUTION!
– The sensor have been run-in
– Only carry out a zero point calibration if:
– you are using the sensor in the lower limit of
the measuring range
1.
Select the file card "CIO2 -“ - ‘Calibrate sensor’ (arrow keys)
F5 CAL and press the ENTER button
2.
Under [DPD value] enter the value 0.00 mg/l and press the
ENTER-key - the following is now shown on the file card
[Zero point calibration]
3.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
ð - First inlet, then the outlet.
4.
Dismantle the sensor
5.
Rinse the sensor with chlorine free water
6.
Dip the CLT sensor in a container of still mineral water or dis‐
tilled water. The water must be the same temperature as the
sample water.
7.
Stir with the sensor until the measured value of the sensor is
stable and near zero for approx. 5 mins.
8.
Then press the F5 key (CAL)
9.
Re-install the sensor into the flow gauge
10.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
115
Calibration
CAUTION!
Now it is imperative to calibrate the ‘slope’
Calibrate slope for measured variable
chlorite (CIO2 -)
CAL
pH
Temp
ClO2-
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
CAL
CAL
Sensor calibration
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
ClO2Sensor current =
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
ClO24.030 mA
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
1.80 mg/l
32.0 °C
Sensor current =
4.030 mA
Zero point calibration
Push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
CAL
CAL
Calibration value =
1,800 mg/l
Range: 0,000...9,999 mg/l
CAL
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
ClO2-
Calibration value =
Temp. value:
Sensor current =
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
Cl free
4.003 mA
ClO2-
Temp
Zero point calibration
Push CAL key
Sensor value =
Slope
Zero value =
4.6 mg/l
4.006 mA
0.004 mA
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
CAL
HELP
OFF
CAL
ESC
Central
menu item
A0164
Fig. 47: Chlorite (ClO2 -)
CAUTION!
– Before calibrating the slope, wait until the meas‐
ured value is constant (minimum 15 mins)
– Chlorite must be permanently present in the
sample water (approx 0.5 mg/l)! Otherwise the
measuring system cannot calibrate.
– Check the calibration 24 hrs after initial commis‐
sioning by means of DPD
116
1.
Select the file card "CIO2 -“ - ‘Calibrate sensor’ off (arrow
keys)
2.
If the [Sensor value] is stable, press F5
3.
Immediately afterwards, take a water sample from the flow
gauge
4.
Immediately afterwards determine the CIO2 - content of the
sample water with a photometer and a suitable sampling
instrument (e.g. DPD)
5.
Enter the CIO2 --content (arrow keys) and press F5 CAL
6.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display
Calibration
In the event that the DXCa indicates an excessively low measured
value or cannot be calibrated after the sensor has been run in (for
CLT approx. 2 - 6 hrs) then the run-in times should be doubled and
extended into the following day.
If the sensor still cannot not be calibrated, then please phone
ProMinent customer service.
8.9 Calibrate measured variable for peracetic acid (PES)
Calibrate measured variable slope for
peracetic acid (PES)
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
PES
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
CAL
A0165
Fig. 48: Calibrate measured variable for peracetic acid (PES)
CAUTION!
– Please also observe the operating instructions for
the sensor and flow gauge
– Following the replacement of a sensor membrane
cap or electrolyte, the slope has to be calibrated
– Avoid air bubbles in the measured water. Air bub‐
bles, which adhere to the membrane of the sensor,
can result in too low a reading and thus lead to
over-metering.
– The slope has to be re-calibrated at regular inter‐
vals to ensure the optimal operation of the sensor.
– Please note the applicable national guidelines for
calibration intervals
Prerequisites
n Constant flow on flow gauge - minimum 20 l/h
n Constant temperature of the sample water
n The sensor have been run-in
It is not necessary to carry out zero point calibration
117
Calibration
CAL
pH
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope =
Zero value =
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
4.8 mg/l
4.008 mA
0.004 mA
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
PES
PES
Sensor current =
PES
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
HELP
OFF
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
Cl free
CAL
CAL
Sensor calibration
4.030 mA
Calibration value =
Temp. value =
1.80 mg/l
32.0 °C
Sensor current =
4.030 mA
Enter value and
push CAL key
Enter value and push CAL key
CAL
CAL
Calibration value=
1.800 mg/l
Range: 0.000...9.999 mg/l
CAL
CAL
pH
Sensor calibration
Sensor calibration
Redox
PES
Calibration value =
Temp. value:
Sensor current =
Cl free
1.8 mg/l
32.0 °C
Temp
Sensor value =
Slope
Zero value =
4.6 mg/l
4.006 mA
0.004 mA
PES
4.003 mA
Enter value and
push CAL key
Push CAL key before tapping sampling water
CAL
HELP
OFF
CAL
ESC
Central
menu item
A0166
Fig. 49: Calibrate slope for peracetic acid (PES)
CAUTION!
– Check the calibration 24 hrs after initial commis‐
sioning
– Repeat the calibration process in the event that the
PES concentration varies by more than 15 % from
the reference value
1.
Select the file card[PES] - ‘Calibrate sensor’ (arrow keys) F5
CAL and press the ENTER button
2.
Press F5 CAL if the sensor value is stable
3.
Shut down the measured water (acknowledge possible alarm
with the ENTER button)
ð - First inlet, then the outlet.
4.
Fill a standard solution with a known PES concentration e.g.
into the DLG III flow gauge container
5.
Stir the contents of the container with a magnetic stirring bar
6.
Dip the sensor into the container until the measured value
remains constant (15 mins). Enter the PES content (arrow
keys) and press F5 CAL.
7.
Open the shut-off valves for the measured water
ð First open the outlet, then the inlet.
8.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display
In the event that the DXCa indicates an excessively low measured
value or cannot be calibrated after the sensor has been run in (for
PAA approx. 1 - 2 hrs) then the run-in times should be doubled and
extended into the following day.
118
Calibration
If the sensor still cannot not be calibrated, then please phone
ProMinent customer service.
8.10
Calibration measured variable temperature
Calibration measured variable tem‐
perature
CAL
pH
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
Sensor check
Temp.meas with Pt1000/100
Sensor value =
24.9 °C
Set value =
26.2 °C
Temp
The value can only be adjusted within a range
of ± 4 °C deviating from the factory
calibration
HOME
CAL
A0167
Fig. 50: Calibration measured variable temperature
–
–
–
You should only calibrate an external temperature
sensor if:
– you are using the temperature measurement
from chlorine sensors
– you are using type PT100 temperature sensors
– you have a precise reference instrument
Do not exchange the temperature sensors during
the calibration process
The temperature value can only be adjusted within
a range of ± 4 °C from the factory set calibrated
value
1.
Take a water sample of minimum 250 ml
2.
Dip the external PT100 temperature sensor from the DXCa
and the reference instrument sensor into the sample simulta‐
neously
3.
Press the ENTER key when the sensor value is stable
4.
Under [set value] enter the reference instrument value (arrow
keys) and press the ENTER key
5.
Press F5 (SAVE) in order to conclude the calibration process
and store the values
6.
If you do not want to carry out any more calibrations, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display
119
Assign parameters
9
Assign parameters
MEAS
pH
Redox
Cl free
Cl tot
CTRL
OUTP
ALARM
ECO
Measurement parameters
Sensor check:
Temp.input:
Temp. value =
ON
Entry
25.6 °C
Temp
Flock
HELP
HOME
DATE
TIME
LANGUAG
A0136
Fig. 51: Assign parameters
This chapter describes the menu items for the parameter groups:
n
n
n
n
n
Measurement
Control
mA Output
Alarm
Eco!Mode
for the individual DXCa measured variables and flocculants.
9.1 All parameters
Default values
The default values can be loaded in the second menu
item for the current file card with F4 (DEFAULT)
Exit a file card in the parameter menu:
1.
without saving: press the ESC key repeatedly until the DXCa
returns to the permanent display
2.
with saving: Press F5, if SAVE is shown above. Confirm the
prompt ‘Really save?’ with the ENTER button. If you do not
want to carry out any more parametric assignments, press
the ESC key to return to the permanent display or central
menu item.
9.2 Measurement
Access to measurement settings
1.
Back with ESC
You can return back to the previous menu by
pressing the ESC key.
Access to the settings is realised from the central menu item
2.
120
Press the F3 button (PARAM)
Assign parameters
3.
Select the desired measured variable with the vertical arrow
keys
4.
Then select file card [MESS] with the horizontal arrow keys
5.
Then press the ENTER button
ð You are now in the control system settings area.
6.
Select the desired parameter with the vertical arrow keys
7.
Then press the ENTER button
8.
Adjust the parameter with the vertical or horizontal arrow
keys
9.
Move the cursor to the left or right with the help of the hori‐
zontal arrow keys
10.
Conclude your entry with the ENTER key
11.
Exit the file card without saving: Press the ESC button.
Exit the file card with saving: press F5 if [SAVE] is visible.
Confirm the prompt [Really save?] with the ENTER button.
9.2.1 Parametric assignment pH
MEAS
pH
Measurement parameters
Sensor check:
Temp. input:
Temp. value =
ON
Entry
25.6 °C
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0168
Fig. 52: Measurement pH
Adjustable variables
Increment
Sensor check
Off
Remarks
on
liquid ref. Pot:
Temp.input:
Off
appears only with configured equipotential bonding pin
on
Equipotential bonding pin must be connected
PT1000 (100)
Chlorine sensor or separate temperature sensor
Entry
Temp.value
Sensor monitoring
0,0 ... 99.9 °C
At [Temp.input. Entry ]
Under "Sensor check" select [on] or [off], in order to switch the
sensor monitoring system on or off.
121
Assign parameters
The resistance of the pH sensor is measured if sensor monitoring
is activated.
If the resistance value remains under 2 MΩ for longer than 1
minute during operation, an error message appears in the central
menu item. [pH sensor defective!]. However, if the value is above
200 MΩ and the measured signal fluctuates considerably, then
error message [Fault pH input!] is triggered.
9.2.2 Parametric assignment redox
System
1
MEAS
Redox
Measurement parameters
Sensor check:
Liquid ref. Pot:
EIN
EIN
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0170
Fig. 53: Redox measurement
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Sensor check
off
The device van display a pH-corrected value for free
chlorine
on
liquid ref. Pot:
Sensor monitoring
off
appears only with configured equipotential bonding pin
on
Equipotential bonding pin must be connected
Select under [Sensor check] [ON] or [ OFF], in order to switch the
redox sensor monitoring system on or off.
The resistance of the redox sensor is measured if sensor moni‐
toring is activated.
If the resistance value remains under 2 MΩ for longer than 1
minute during operation, an error message appears in the central
menu item. [Redox sensor defective!]. However, if the value is
above 200 MΩ and the measured signal fluctuates considerably,
then error message [Fault redox input!] is triggered.
122
Assign parameters
9.2.3 Parametric assignment "chlorine free"
MEAS
Measurement parameters
pH correction:
ON
Cl free
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0169
Fig. 54: Measurement for free chlorine
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
pH correction
on
The device van display a pH-corrected value for free
chlorine
off
NOTICE!
If you calibrated with pH correction, then you may only
measure with pH correction! If you calibrated without
pH correction, then you may only measure without pH
correction
123
Assign parameters
9.2.4 Parametric assignment "chlorine bound"
System 1
MEAS
Measurement parameters
pH correction:
ON
Cl comb.
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0171
Fig. 55: Measurement for bound chlorine
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
pH correction
on
The device van display a pH-corrected value for bound
chlorine
off
NOTICE!
If you calibrated with pH correction, then you may only
measure with pH correction. If you calibrated without
pH correction, then you may only measure without pH
correction.
The DXCa calculates the displayed value for bonded
chlorine as the difference between the measured
values from the free chlorine and total chlorine sensors
(CLE and CTE).
124
Assign parameters
9.2.5 Parametric assignment fluoride (F−)
Pool 1
MEAS
Measurement parameters
Temp.input:
Temp.value =
Entry
32.0 °C
F
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0172
Fig. 56: Measurement fluoride (F−)
Only available when the terminal [I in 2 ] on the I module is config‐
ured for measured variable "F-".
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Temp.input:
switched off
The device van display a pH-corrected value for free
chlorine
Entry
Sensor *
Temp.value
0,0 ... 99.9 °C
At [ Temp.input. Entry]
* Only available when the terminal [I in 3] on the I module is configured for measured variable
[Temperature]
125
Assign parameters
9.2.6 Parametric assignment ClO2
Pool
1
MEAS
Measurement parameters
Temp.input:
Temp.value =
Entry
32.0 °C
ClO2
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0173
Fig. 57: Measurement ClO2
Only available when the terminal [ I in 2] on the I module is config‐
ured for measured variable CIO2 and no chlorine sensor is con‐
nected.
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Temp.input:
switched off
The device van display a pH-corrected value for free
chlorine
Entry
Sensor *
Temp.value
At [Temp.input. Entry]
0,0 ... 99.9 °C
* Only available when the terminal [I in 3] on the I module is configured for measured variable
[Temperature]
9.2.7 Parametric assignment H2O2
System 1
MEAS
Measurement parameters
Temp.input:
Temp.value =
Entry
32.0 °C
H2O2
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0174
Fig. 58: Measurement H2O2
126
Assign parameters
Only available when the terminal [I in 2] on the I module is config‐
ured for measured variable "CIO"2 and no chlorine sensor is con‐
nected.
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Temp.input:
switched off
The device van display a pH-corrected value for free
chlorine
Entry
Sensor *
Temp.value
At [Temp.input. Entry]
0,0 ... 99.9 °C
* Only available when the terminal[ I in 3] on the I module is configured for measured variable
[Temperature]
9.3 Control
Access to control settings
1.
Back with ESC
You can return back to the previous menu by
pressing the ESC key.
Access to the settings is realised from the central menu item
2.
Press the F3 button (PARAM)
3.
Select the desired measured variable with the vertical arrow
keys
4.
Then select file card [MESS] with the horizontal arrow keys
5.
Then press the ENTER button
ð You are now in the control system settings area.
6.
Select the desired parameter with the vertical arrow keys
7.
Then press the ENTER button
8.
Adjust the parameter with the vertical or horizontal arrow
keys
9.
Move the cursor to the left or right with the help of the hori‐
zontal arrow keys
10.
Conclude your entry with the ENTER key
11.
Exit the file card without saving: Press the ESC button.
Exit the file card with saving: press F5 if [SAVE] is visible.
Confirm the prompt [Really save?] with the ENTER button.
127
Assign parameters
9.3.1 pH Control
CAUTION!
Always check if for the settings under [Control] or
[control direction] the requirements have actually been
set in the configuration menu.
System
1
CTRL
pH
Control parameters
Control type:
Set point =
Basic load =
Neutral zone =
Xp =
Tn =
Tv =
Checkout time =
Disturbance feedfwd:
Control:
2-way PID
7.20 pH
0.0 %
0.05 pH
1.5 pH
0s
0s
0 min
not active
active
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0175
Fig. 59: pH Control
Adjustable variables
Increment
Control type
Manual
Remarks
2-way PID
refer to Fig. 60
1-way PID
refer to Fig. 61
2-way P
1-way P
Set point
0,00 ... 12.00 pH
Basic load
-100,0 ... 100,0 %
Neutral zone
0,00 ... 1.00 pH
xp*
0,01 ... 70.00 pH
Tn
0 ... 9999 s
At [Control] [PID]
Tv
0 ... 2500 s
At [Control] [PID]
control direction
Acid pump
Acid, under one-way control
pH-raise
Alkali, under one-way control
checkout time
0 ... 999 min
Not for [Control] [Manual]
Cut-in interference vari‐
able
not active
man. metering
mult.
Multiplicative interference value from[ I in 1]
add.
Additive
-100,0 ... 100,0 %
under [Control] [Manual]
* For definition xp see glossary
128
Assign parameters
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Control
active
The control circuit can be switched off independently from
the START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all
control circuits in the selected system
not active
* For definition xp see glossary
We recommend a pH value of 7.2, as chlorine offers
an excellent level of disinfection in this range. In addi‐
tion, skin tolerance is good at this pH value.
Fig. 60: Control type 2-way PID, without and with neutral zone
I. Actuating variable
II. Neutral Zone
III. Set point
A0177
Fig. 61: Control type 1-way PID, direction pH lower and direction pH raiser
I. Actuating variable
II. Set point
129
Assign parameters
9.3.2 Redox control
Redox is not applicable if chlorine is controlled.
System 1
CTRL
Control parameters
Redox
Control type:
Set point =
Basic load =
Xp =
Tn =
Tv =
Checkout time =
Control:
2-way PID
750 mV
0,0 %
20 mV
0 s
0 s
0 min
active
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0178
Fig. 62: Redox control
Adjustable variables
Increment
Control type
2-way PID
Disinfection controller
2-way P
2-Pt. contact
Remarks
refer to Fig. 63
Manual
Control type
1-way PID
Swimming pool con‐
troller
1-way P
2-Pt. contact
refer to Fig. 63
Manual
Set point
700 ... 850 mV
Basic load
0,0 ... 100,0 %
xp*
1 ... 1000 mV
Tn
0 ... 9999 s
At [Control] [PID]
Tv
0 ... 2500 s
At [Control] [PID]
Switch diff. =
0 ... 50 mV
MIN switch-on time
0 ... 6000 s
MIN switch-off time
0 ... 6000 s
checkout time
0 ... 999 min
* For definition xp see glossary
130
Not for [Control] [Manual]
Assign parameters
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Control
active
The control circuit can be switched off independently from
the START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all
control circuits in the selected system
not active
* For definition xp see glossary
CAUTION!
Always check if for the settings under [Control] or
[control direction] the requirements have actually been
set in the configuration menu.
A0179
Fig. 63: Example control type 2-point contact
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Actuating variable
Switching points
Set point
Switch diff. =
131
Assign parameters
9.3.3 Free chlorine control
System 1
CTRL
Control parameters
Cl free
2 Pt.Contact
Control type:
1.50 mg/l
Set point =
0.05 mg/l
Switch diff. =
120 s
MIN ON-time =
MIN OFF-time =
120 s
0 min
Checkout time =
not active
Disturbance feedfwd:
active
Control:
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0181
Fig. 64: Free chlorine control
Adjustable variables
Increment
Control type
2-way PID
Disinfection controller
2-way P
2-Pt. contact
Remarks
refer to Fig. 65
Manual
Control type
1-way PID
Swimming pool con‐
troller
1-way P
2-Pt. contact
refer to Fig. 65
Manual
Set point
0,00 ... 20.00 mg/l
Basic load
0,0 ... 100,0 %
xp*
0,10 ... 99.99 mg/l
Tn
0 ... 9999 s
At [Control] [PID]
Tv
0 ... 2500 s
At [Control] [PID]
Switch diff. =
0,00 ... 0.50 mg/l
MIN switch-on time
0 ... 6000 s
MIN switch-off time
0 ... 6000 s
checkout time
0 ... 999 min
Not for [Control] [Manual]
Control
active
The control circuit can be switched off independently from
the START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all
control circuits in the selected system
not active
* For definition xp see glossary
132
Assign parameters
CAUTION!
Always check if for the settings under [Control] or
[control direction] the requirements have actually been
set in the configuration menu.
A0180
Fig. 65: Example control type 2-point contact and PID controller for chlorine
I.
II.
III.
Actuating variable
Switching points
Set point
IV.
V
Switch diff. =
Control difference
9.3.4 Control for bound chlorine
System 1
CTRL
Control parameters
Cl geb
Control type:
Set point =
Switch diff. =
Switch-on time =
Switch-off time =
Control =
2-Pt. contact
1.50 mg/l
0.05 mg/l
120 s
600 s
ON
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0182
Fig. 66: Control for bound chlorine
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Switching point
0,00 ... 20.00 mg/l
Relay P4 can switch a UV plant above the switching point
Switch diff. =
0,00 ... 0.50 mg/l
MIN switch-on time
0 ... 9999 s
MIN switch-off time
0 ... 9999 s
Only [Control type] [2-Pt. contact] possible
133
Assign parameters
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Control
active
The control circuit can be switched off independently from
the START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all
control circuits in the selected system
not active
Only [Control type] [2-Pt. contact] possible
NOTICE!
– A power relay must be configured in order that the
entries can make effect
– Control Cl geb serves to minimise the bound
chlorine e.g. via a UV plant
For explanation please refer to [limit value] in the glossary (the
switching point corresponds to [max. Limit].)
A0179
Fig. 67: Example control type 2-point contact
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Actuating variable
Switching points
Set point
Switch diff. =
9.3.5 Control temperature
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Switching point
0,0 ... 40.0 °C
Comparable with set point. Relay P4 can switch the hot
water solenoid valve of a heat exchanger
Switch diff. =
0,0 ... 1.5 °C
MIN switch-on time
0 ... 9999 s
MIN switch-off time
0 ... 9999 s
Control
active
not active
Only [Control type] [2-Pt. contact ]possible
134
The control circuit can be switched off independently from
the START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all
control circuits in the selected system
Assign parameters
NOTICE!
– A power relay must be configured in order that the
entries can make effect
For explanation please refer to [limit value] in the glossary (the
switching point corresponds to [max. Limit].)
A0179
Fig. 68: Example control type 2-point contact
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Actuating variable
Switching points
Set point
Switch diff. =
9.3.6 Control flocculants
System 1
CTRL
Flock
Dosing parameters
Circulation =
100,00
Concentration =
0,1 mg/l
Disturbance feedfwd: not active
active
Control:
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0183
Fig. 69: Control flocculants
Adjustable variables
Increment
Circulation
0,0 ... 500.0 m 3/h
Concentration
0,1 ... 9.9 mg/l
Remarks
Desired concentration of flocculent
Only [Control type] [2-Pt. contact] possible
135
Assign parameters
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Control
active
The control circuit can be switched off independently from
the START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all
control circuits in the selected system.
not active
Cut-in interference vari‐
able
not active
mul.
Only [Control type] [2-Pt. contact] possible
Pump output
If a flocculent pump is configured, the the DXCa indicates its
metering capacity under pump capacity after it has been saved
(calculated from circulation and concentration, realised via the
stroke rate) - as a percentage of the max. output.
Under max. output, the DXCa indicates the maximum mathemat‐
ical metering output of the pump type - for the set stroke length,
100% stroke rate and 1.5 bar counter pressure (identical with
output in card file P1, P2 or P3 in the configuring menu).
9.3.7 Control fluoride (F−)
System 1
CTRL
Control parameters
F
Control type:
Set point =
Xp =
Tn =
Tv =
Basic load =
Checkout time =
Control:
PID controller
7.50
00.50
0s
0s
0.0 %
0 min
not active
A0184
Fig. 70: Control fluoride
Adjustable variables
Increment
Control type
PID controller
(F−)
Remarks
P controller
2 Pt.Contact
Manual
Set point
0,00 ... 9.99 ppm
Basic load
0,0 ... 100,0 %
xp*
0 ... 1000 ppm
* For definition xp see glossary
136
refer to Ä on page 136
Assign parameters
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Tn
0 ... 9999 s
At [Control] [ PID]
Tv
0 ... 2500 s
At [Control] [PID]
Switch diff. =
0 ... 50 ppm
MIN switch-on time
0 ... 6000 s
MIN switch-off time
0 ... 6000 s
checkout time
0 ... 999 min
Cut-in interference vari‐
able
not active
Control
Not for [Control] [Manual]
mult.
Multiplicative interference value from [ I in 1]
add.
Additive interference value from [I in 1]
active
Control only with metering pumps with CANopen bus. The
control circuit can be switched off independently from the
START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all control
circuits in the selected system.
not active
* For definition xp see glossary
CAUTION!
Always check if for the settings under [Control] or
[control direction] the requirements have actually been
set in the configuration menu.
A0179
Fig. 71: Example control type 2-point contact
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Actuating variable
Switching points
Set point
Switch diff. =
137
Assign parameters
9.3.8 Control chlorine dioxide (CIO2)
Spring 1
CTRL
Control parameters
ClO2
Control type:
Set point =
Xp =
Tn =
Tv =
Basic load =
Checkout time =
Control:
PID controller
7.50
00.50
0s
0s
0.0 %
0 min
not active
A0185
Fig. 72: Control chlorine dioxide (CIO2)
Adjustable variables
Increment
Control type
PID controller
Remarks
P controller
2 Pt.Contact
refer to Fig. 73
Manual
Set point
0,00 ... 9.99 ppm
Basic load
0,0 ... 100,0 %
xp*
0 ... 1000 ppm
Tn
0 ... 9999 s
At [Control] [PID]
Tv
0 ... 2500 s
At [Control] [PID]
Switch diff. =
0 ... 50 ppm
MIN switch-on time
0 ... 6000 s
MIN switch-off time
0 ... 6000 s
checkout time
0 ... 999 min
Cut-in interference vari‐
able
not active
Control
mult.
Multiplicative interference value from [I in 1]
add.
Additive interference value from[ I in 1]
active
Control only with metering pumps with CANopen bus. The
control circuit can be switched off independently from the
START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all control
circuits in the selected system.
not active
* For definition xp see glossary
138
Not for [Control] [Manual]
Assign parameters
CAUTION!
Always check if for the settings under [Control] or
[control direction] the requirements have actually been
set in the configuration menu.
A0179
Fig. 73: Example control type 2-point contact
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Actuating variable
Switching points
Set point
Switch diff. =
9.3.9 Control H2O2
Spring 1
CTRL
Control parameters
H2O2
Control type:
Set point =
Xp =
Tn =
Tv =
Basic load =
Checkout time =
Control:
PID controller
7.50
00.50
0s
0s
0.0 %
0 min
not active
A0186
Fig. 74: Control H2O2
Adjustable variables
Increment
Control type
PID controller
Remarks
P controller
2 Pt.Contact
refer to Fig. 75
Manual
* For definition xp see glossary
139
Assign parameters
Adjustable variables
Increment
Set point
0,00 ... 1999 ppm
Basic load
0,0 ... 100,0 %
xp*
0 ... 1000 ppm
Tn
0 ... 9999 s
At [Control ] [PID]
Tv
0 ... 2500 s
At [Control] [PID]
Switch diff. =
0 ... 50 ppm
MIN switch-on time
0 ... 6000 s
MIN switch-off time
0 ... 6000 s
checkout time
0 ... 999 min
Cut-in interference vari‐
able
not active
Control
Remarks
Not for [Control] [Manual]
mult.
Multiplicative interference value from [I in 1]
add.
Additive interference value from [l in 1]
active
Control only with metering pumps with CANopen bus. The
control circuit can be switched off independently from the
START/STOP key. The START/STOP-key stops all control
circuits in the selected system.
not active
* For definition xp see glossary
CAUTION!
Always check if for the settings under [Control] or
[control direction] the requirements have actually been
set in the configuration menu.
A0179
Fig. 75: Example control type 2-point contact
I.
II.
III.
IV.
140
Actuating variable
Switching points
Set point
Switch diff. =
Assign parameters
9.4 Set mA output
To be carried out in a uniform manner
for all measured variables
Access to settings for mA output
1.
Back with ESC
You can return back to the previous menu by
pressing the ESC key.
Access to the settings is realised from the central menu item
2.
Press the F3 button (PARAM)
3.
Select the desired measured variable with the vertical arrow
keys
4.
Then select file card [OUTP] with the horizontal arrow keys
5.
Then press the ENTER button
ð You are now in the control system settings area.
6.
Select the desired parameter with the vertical arrow keys
7.
Then press the ENTER button
8.
Adjust the parameter with the vertical or horizontal arrow
keys
9.
Move the cursor to the left or right with the help of the hori‐
zontal arrow keys
10.
Conclude your entry with the ENTER key
11.
Exit the file card without saving: Press the ESC button.
Exit the file card with saving: press F5 if [SAVE] is visible.
Confirm the prompt [Really save?] with the ENTER button.
System
1
OUTP
pH
Parameters mA-output
Value 0/4 mA =
Value 20 mA =
Range:
Value on error =
0.00 pH
14.00 pH
0-20 mA
23 mA
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0187
Fig. 76: Set mA output for example pH
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Value 0/4 mA
0,00 ... xx,xx Y *
mA-value dependent on [Range]
Value 20 mA
0,00 ... xx,xx Y *
* "xx,xx Y" stands for the value and the unit of measurement for a measured variable on this controller
141
Assign parameters
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Range
0-20 mA
Not for [Iout ] [free] (see configuration)
4-20 mA
Value on error
Not for [Iout] [free] (see configuration)
23 mA
OFF
3.7 mA
22 mA
* "xx,xx Y" stands for the value and the unit of measurement for a measured variable on this controller
9.5 Alarm settings
To be carried out in a uniform manner
for all measured variables
Access to alarm settings
1.
Back with ESC
You can return back to the previous menu by
pressing the ESC key.
Access to the settings is realised from the central menu item
2.
Press the F3 button (PARAM)
3.
Select the desired measured variable with the vertical arrow
keys
4.
Then select file card [ALARM] with the horizontal arrow keys
5.
Then press the ENTER button
ð You are now in the control system settings area.
6.
Select the desired parameter with the vertical arrow keys
7.
Then press the ENTER button
8.
Adjust the parameter with the vertical or horizontal arrow
keys
9.
Move the cursor to the left or right with the help of the hori‐
zontal arrow keys
10.
Conclude your entry with the ENTER key
11.
Exit the file card without saving: Press the ESC button.
Exit the file card with saving: press F5 if [SAVE] is visible.
Confirm the prompt [Really save?] with the ENTER button.
142
Assign parameters
System 1
AL
pH
Alarm parameters
min. limit =
min. alarm:
max. limit =
max. Alarm:
Delay =
5.00 pH
not active
8.00 pH
active
10 s
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0188
Fig. 77: Set alarm for example pH
ALARM
Q
Alarm parameters
min. limit =
min. alarm:
max. limit =
max. alarm:
Delay =
Switching off controller:
20,0
not active
80,0
not active
0s
not active
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0270
Fig. 78: Set alarm for an example flow meter
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Min.Limit
0,00 ... xx,xx Y *
Min.Alarm
Inactive
Only fault alert in the event of error
Active
In the event of fault, fault alert, signal horn, relay Must be
acknowledged
Max.Limit
0,00 ... xx,xx Y *
Max.Alarm
Inactive
Only fault alert in the event of error
Active
In the event of fault, fault alert, signal horn, relay Must be
acknowledged
Delay
0 ... 3600 s
* "xx,xx Y" stands for the value and the unit of measurement for a measured variable on this controller
143
Assign parameters
9.6 Parametric assignment flow meter
ALARM
Q
Alarm parameters
min. limit =
min. alarm:
max. limit =
max. alarm:
Delay =
Switching off controller:
20,0
not active
80,0
not active
0s
not active
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0270
Fig. 79: Alarm flow meter
Adjustable variables
Increment
min. Limit
0,00 ... 99.99 m 3/h
min. Alarm
active
not active
max. Limit
0,00 ... 99.99 m 3/h
Max. Alarm
active
not active
Delay
0 ... 3600 seconds
Switching off controller
active
not active
144
Remarks
Assign parameters
9.7 Setting Eco!Mode
For detailed information about the configurable varia‐
bles see Ä Chapter 9.1 ‘All parameters’ on page 120
Access to settings for ECO mode
1.
Back with ESC
You can return back to the previous menu by
pressing the ESC key.
Access to the settings is realised from the central menu item
2.
Press the F3 button (PARAM)
3.
Select the desired measured variable with the vertical arrow
keys
4.
Then select file card [ECO] with the horizontal arrow keys
5.
Then press the ENTER button
ð You are now in the control system settings area.
6.
Select the desired parameter with the vertical arrow keys
7.
Then press the ENTER button
8.
Adjust the parameter with the vertical or horizontal arrow
keys
9.
Move the cursor to the left or right with the help of the hori‐
zontal arrow keys
10.
Conclude your entry with the ENTER key
11.
Exit the file card without saving: Press the ESC button.
Exit the file card with saving: press F5 if [SAVE] is visible.
Confirm the prompt [Really save?] with the ENTER button.
System
pH
1
ECO
ECO-mode parameters
Control type:
Set E =
XpE =
TnE =
TvE =
2-way PID
7.20 pH
1.50 pH
0s
0s
SAVE
A0189
Fig. 80: Setting Eco!Mode
145
Assign parameters
Eco!Mode enables a 2nd set of parameters to be temporarily acti‐
vated in order to save power. This can, for example, be carried out
synchronously with a reduction in the circulating output. Eco!Mode
is activated or deactivated as soon as a contact is switched on
contact input K3 of the M module. Eco!Mode is available for all M
module measured variables, if they are controlled:
n
n
n
n
n
n
pH
Redox
chlorine free
chlorine bound
Temperature
Flocculent
As soon as the 2nd set of parameters is activated, the central
menu item indicates a green ECO identifier. In order to activate it,
open the file card DXMaM in the configuration menu and set con‐
nection K3 to "Eco!Mode".
9.8 Chlorine dosing redox dependent
System 1
AL
Redox
Alarm parameters
min. limit =
min. alarm :
max. limit =
max. alarm :
Delay =
5,00 pH
not active
8,00 pH
active
10 s
Chlorine dosing redox dependent:
Factor F =
Redox -> Cl limit =
Xp Redox -> Cl =
DEFAULT
active
1,00
800 mV
100 mV
SAVE
A0340
Fig. 81: Chlorine dosing redox dependent
This setting under Parameter > Redox > Alarm enables the
‘Chlorine’ metering to be influenced by the ‘Redox’ measured var‐
iable.
Example: ‘Chlorine dosing redox dependent’ is active and set
value Chlorine is 100%
k=0.5 and redox ➨ "Cl Limit" = 800 mV
n Reading ‘Redox’ is < than redox ➨ ‘Cl Limit’ = 800 mV
– then the ‘Cl’ set value remains unchanged at 100%
n Reading ‘Redox’ is > than redox ➨ ‘Cl Limit’ = 800 mV
– then the ‘Cl’ set value is multiplied by ‘k’
– ➨ 100 % * 0,50 ➨ 50 % reduction in ‘Cl’ metering
If k=1 then Xp = 100 mV value for proportional metering
n Reading ‘Redox’ is < than redox ➨ ‘Cl Limit’ = 800 mV
– then the ‘Cl’ set value remains unchanged at 100%
n Reading ‘Redox’ (801 mV) is > than redox ➨ ‘Cl Limit’ = 800
mV
– then the ‘Cl’ Set value 100 % - (801-800) * 100 % / 100 =
99 %
146
Assign parameters
n Reading ‘Redox’ (900 mV) is > than redox ➨ ‘Cl Limit’ = 800
mV
– then the ‘Cl’ Set value 100 % - (900-800) * 100 % / 100 = 0
%
n Reading ‘Redox’ (910 mV) is > than redox ➨ ‘Cl Limit’ = 800
mV
– then the ‘Cl’ Set value 100 % - (910-800) * 100 % / 100 = 0
%
This behaviour enables a reduction in chlorine
metering, despite the fact that according to the chlorine
measurement, the proportion of ‘Chlorine’ in the
sample water is too low. However, due to the high
redox potential, a sufficient level of disinfection is still
ensured.
147
Configure
10
Configure
Pool
Sensor
RTD:
(pH)ORP:
POT1:
POT2:
(pH)ORP:
terminals
free
Redox sensor
free
free
pH sensor
Soft. vers. 0967
OPTION
HELP
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1: Type: NO
Delay =
0s
K2: Pause
K2: Type: NO
Delay =
0s
K3: Eco!Mode
K3: Type: NO
Node - ID
15
Serial no. 2004106040
PASSW
UPDATE
BUS
A0190
Fig. 82: Configure
The file cards of the individual CAN modules show the software
version of the module on the left-hand side and, to the right, the
assigned CAN node number (Node ID) and the serial number (R.
no. on the module type plate).
–
–
–
Access to configuration settings
1.
The CAN-chlorine sensors and CAN-pumps are
also modules
Terminals that are not occupied must be config‐
ured as ‘free ’
Each file card indicates the alignment of the
module terminals with a coloured background at
the top as a mnemonic aid
Back with ESC
You can return to the previous menu by pressing
the ESC key.
Access to the settings is realised from the central menu item
2.
Then press the F4 button (CONFIG)
3.
Select the desired measured variable with the horizontal
arrow keys
4.
Then press the ENTER button
ð You are now in the control system settings area.
5.
Select the desired parameter with the vertical / horizontal
arrow keys
ð The selected parameter will be shown with a black back‐
ground
148
6.
Then press the ENTER button
7.
Adjust the parameter with the vertical or horizontal arrow
keys
8.
Move the cursor to the left or right with the help of the hori‐
zontal arrow keys
9.
Conclude your entry with the ENTER key
Configure
10.
Exit the file card without saving: press the ESC key
Exit the file card with saving: Press F5 if [SAVE ]is displayed.
Confirm the query [Save changes?] by pressing the ENTER
key
10.1
Configuring module DXMaM
M module (measurement module)
Becken
Sensor terminals
RTD:
Pt1000/100
(pH)ORP:
ORP-Sensor
POT1:
not used
POT2:
not used
(pH)ORP:
pH-sensor
Digital inputs
K1: Sampling water
K1: type: NO
delay= 0s
K2: Pause
K2: type: NO
delay= 0s
K3: Eco!Mode
K3: type: NO
Eco!Mode
CONFIG
DEFAULT SAVE
Fig. 83: M module (measurement module)
Sensor terminals
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
RTD (Temperature)
PT1000/PT100
PT1000/PT100 (self detection) if no chlorine
sensor is used
not used
not occupied
(pH) ORP
POT1
POT2
pH (ORP)
ORP sensor
free
not occupied
Flow.potential*
Closed [(pH) ORP]
free
not occupied
Liquid ref. pot*
Closed [pH (ORP)]
free
not occupied
pH sensor
free
not occupied
* For equipotential bonding pin. Do not connect to earth! No jumper necessary.
Digital inputs
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
K1
Sampling water
Sample water monitoring
K1 type
NC
K1 – K3 are the digital inputs on the M module DXMaM (the A module DXMaA has the same identifiers!).
149
Configure
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
NO
Delay (contact)
0 ... 3600 s
K2
NC
NO
Delay (contact)
0 ... 3600 s
K3
Eco!Mode
2. Set of parameters for all controlled varia‐
bles not assigned
Excess chlorination
Excess chlorination &
Eco!Mode
free
K3 type
NC
NO
K1 – K3 are the digital inputs on the M module DXMaM (the A module DXMaA has the same identifiers!).
Filter backflushing
Excess chlorination functional description:
n Filter backflushing is started by an external controller
n The control circuits for pH, chlorine, ORP and flocculent are set
to pause via the M module contact K2. ‘K2 ACTIVE’
n M module contact K3 (this must be set to ‘Excess chlorination’
or ‘Excess chlorination & Eco!Mode’ ) serves to force the
chlorine actuator ‘active’ if K2 and K3 are both ‘active’ .
n Controllable with a configurable percentage input (0-100%) and
duration limited from 1 - 20 minutes
n This only applies to the chlorine actuating variable - all others
are set to pause.
n The control is realised without controller and without considera‐
tion of error messages relating to the sample water
n The following message is shown on the display: ‘Pool No. "n"
chlorine: Excess chlorination’
n Filter backflushing does not work with the R module
n Stop / start by pressing the STOP/START button, but the time
for Excess chlorination continues to run, regardless of whether
stop is pressed or not. After start, the remaining time will still be
metered.
All messages are written to the ‘Event File’ .
10.1.1
150
Configuring module DXMaM ECO mode
1.
Select the menu ‘Configure’ , see Ä ‘Access to configuration
settings’ on page 148
2.
Select the menu ‘Configuring module DXMaM’ , see
Ä Chapter 10.1 ‘Configuring module DXMaM’ on page 149
Configure
ECO-mode parameters
3.
In the menu ‘Configuring module DXMaM’ press key F2
[Eco!Mode CONFIG]
ð The following display appears:
System 1
ECO-mode parameters
ECO ISO:
ECO Contact:
ECO 0-24 h:
ECO time:
active
inactive
inactive
active
every day
ECO start-time:
from: 10 : 11 clock
ECO End-time:
until: 12 : 10 clock
ECO takes: 02 h
ISO NORM
SAVE
CONFIG
A0614
Fig. 84: Display: Configuring DXMaM ECO-mode parameters
4.
Select the desired parameter using the vertical/horizontal
arrow keys and confirm by pressing the ENTER key
ð The following display appears:
System 1
ECO-mode parameters
ECO ISO:
ECO Contakt:
ECO 0-24 h:
ECO time:
active
inactive
inactive
active
every day
ECO start-time:
from: 10 : 11 Uhr
ECO End-time:
until: 12 : 10 clock
ECO takes: 02 h
ECO ISO:
active
A0617
Fig. 85: Parameter adjustment
151
Configure
5.
Select the desired state, e.g. active/inactive, using the ver‐
tical/horizontal arrow keys and confirm by pressing the
ENTER key
ð The following display appears:
System 1
ECO-mode parameters
ECO ISO:
ECO Contact:
ECO 0-24 h:
ECO time:
every day
ECO start-time:
from: 10 : 11 clock
ECO End-time:
until: 12 : 10 clock
active
inactive
inactive
active
ECO takes: 02 h
ISO NORM
SAVE
CONFIG
A0614
Fig. 86: Display: Configuring DXMaM ECO-mode parameters
You can carry this process out for all displayed parame‐
ters
DIN parameter
6.
In the ECO-mode parameters menu press key
F2[ ISO standard CONFIG]
ð The following display appears:
System 1
Parameter ISO
ISO value ON/OFF
pH
ORP
Cl
comb. Cl
Temp
MINIMAL WERTE
pH =
6,50 pH
active
inactive
inactive
inactive
inactive
MAXIMAL WERTE
pH =
7,60 pH
SAVE
A0615
Fig. 87: Display: ISO parameter
152
Configure
7.
Select the desired parameter using the vertical/horizontal
arrow keys and confirm by pressing the ENTER key
ð The following display appears:
System 1
Parameter ISO
ISO value ON/OFF
pH
ORP
Cl
comb. Cl
Temp
MINIMAL WERTE
pH =
6,50 pH
pH =
06.50 pH
Rng. :
active
inactive
inactive
inactive
inactive
MAXIMAL WERTE
pH =
7,60 pH
0,00 ... 14,00 pH
A0618
Fig. 88: Parameter adjustment
8.
Select the desired value, e.g. 06.51 pH using the vertical/hor‐
izontal arrow keys and confirm by pressing the ENTER key
ð The following display appears:
System 1
Parameter ISO
ISO value ON/OFF
pH
ORP
Cl
comb. Cl
Temp
MINIMAL WERTE
pH =
6,50 pH
active
inactive
inactive
inactive
inactive
MAXIMAL WERTE
pH =
7,60 pH
SAVE
A0615
Fig. 89: Display: ISO parameter
153
Configure
9.
Further procedure:
n You can now repeat this process as often as necessary
for the selectable parameter
n or exit the menu by pressing the ESC key, so that the set
parameter is not adopted
n or you can press the F5 [SAVE]key, whereupon the set
parameters are adopted
F5 [SAVE]: The parameters are written to the controller.
ð After pressing the ESC or F5 key, the following display
appears:
System 1
ECO-mode parameters
ECO ISO:
ECO Contact:
ECO 0-24 h:
ECO time:
active
inactive
inactive
active
every day
ECO start-time:
from: 10 : 11 clock
ECO End-time:
until: 12 : 10 clock
ECO takes: 02 h
ISO NORM
CONFIG
SAVE
A0614
Fig. 90: Display: Configuring DXMaM ECO-mode parameters
10.
Further procedure:
n You can now repeat this process as often as necessary
for the selectable parameter
n or exit the menu by pressing the ESC key, so that the set
parameter is not adopted
n or you can press the F5 [SAVE]key, whereupon the set
parameters are adopted
F5 [SAVE]: The parameters are written to the controller.
ð After pressing the ESC or F5 key, you return here
Ä Chapter 10.1 ‘Configuring module DXMaM’
on page 149
154
#
Parameter
0
NO ECO
1
ISO + contact +24 h
2
ISO + contact + time
3
ISO + contact
4
ISO + time
5
ISO + 24 h
6
Contact + time
7
Contact + 24 h
8
Contact
Configure
#
Parameter
9
Time
10
24 h - not allowed
11
ISO
155
Configure
10.2
Configuring module DXMaA
A module (control module)
System
1
A
DXMaA
R1 R2 R3 K1 K2 K3 Iout1 Iout2 Iout3 Iout4
Pump terminals
Recorder
R1: Acid pump
Iout1: pH Value
Max . freq.
= 180 Str/min
Iout2 :ORP value
K1 type
NO
Iout3 :free chlorine
R2: ORP pump
Iout4 :ph lower dosing
Max . freq.
= 180 Str/min
K2 type
NO
R3: Flocculant pump
= 180 Str/min
Max . freq.
Capacity=
1,40 l/h
K3 type
NO
Circulation
SERVICE CONFIG
DEFAULT SAVE
A0192
Fig. 91: Configuring module DXMaA
Pump terminals:
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
R1
Acid pump
For external input acid pump
Alkaline pump
For external input alkali pump
free
not occupied
max. freq.
0 ... 500 strokes
Only if the pump is selected
K1 type
NO
Only if the pump is selected
NC
Only if the pump is selected
free
not occupied
Chlorine pump
For external input sodium hypochlorite
pump
Acid pump
For external input acid pump
ORP pump
For external input
free
not occupied
Ctrl.out 12 mA
If DXMaI is selected on the bus
0 ... 500 strokes
Only if the pump is selected
NO
Only if the pump is selected
NC
Only if the pump is selected
free
not occupied
Flocculent pump
For external input flocculent pump
Chlorine pump
For external input sodium hypochlorite
pump
ORP pump
For external input
R2
max. freq.
R3
R1 – R3 are frequency outputs; K1 – K3 are digital inputs. K1 – K3 are the digital inputs of the A module
DXMaA (the M module DXMaM has the same identifiers!).
156
Configure
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
free
not occupied
max. freq.
0 ... 500 strokes
Only if the pump is selected
Performance
0,10 ... 18.00 l/h
Only if the pump is selected
K3 type
NO
Only if the pump is selected
NC
Only if the pump is selected
R1 – R3 are frequency outputs; K1 – K3 are digital inputs. K1 – K3 are the digital inputs of the A module
DXMaA (the M module DXMaM has the same identifiers!).
157
Configure
Outputs 0/4-20 mA (standard signal outputs):
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
lout1
pH value
for recorder
pH lower dosing
Control variable
pH lift dosing
Control variable
Cl. dosing
Control variable
Flocc.dosing
Control variable
Ctrl. out ORP
Control variable
Value I2
Ctrl.out I2
Value I3
Cl. dosing
ORP dosing
Iout2
free
not occupied
ORP value
for recorder
Variable pH-lower
Setpoint
Variable pH-raise
Setpoint
Variable chlorination
Setpoint
Variable flocculent
Setpoint
Ctrl. out ORP
Setpoint
Value I2
Ctrl.out 12 mA
Value I3
Variable chlorinationORP dosing
Dosing circulation
Iout3
frei
nicht belegt
Wert Chlor
für Schreiber
Stell. pH-Senker
Stellgröße
Stell. pH-Heber
Stellgröße
Stell. Chlorung
Stellgröße
Stell. Flockung
Stellgröße
Ctrl. out ORP
Stellgröße
Wert I2
Ctrl.out I2
Value I3
Cl. dosing
ORP dosing
free
158
not occupied
Configure
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
lout4
Comb. chlorine
for recorder, "Comb. chlorine value" is the
difference between the measured values
from CLE and CTE
Stell. pH-Senker
Stellgröße
Stell. pH-Heber
Stellgröße
Stell. Chlorung
Stellgröße
Ctrl. out ORP
Control variable
Temperat. val.
For recorder (plotting): temperature value
comes from the chlorine sensor or PT1000/
PT100
Value I2
Ctrl.out I2
Value I3
Cl. dosing
ORP dosing
free
10.2.1
not occupied
Configuring module DXMaA circulation pump
Configure circulation pump parameter
1.
Select the menu ‘Configure’ , see Ä ‘Access to configuration
2.
Select the menu ‘Configuring module DXMaA’ , see
3.
In the menu ‘Configuring module DXMaA’ press key F3
settings’ on page 148
Ä Chapter 10.2 ‘Configuring module DXMaA’ on page 156
[Circulation CONFIG]
ð The following display appears:
System 1
parameter circulation
Range :
Value 0/4 mA=
Value 20 mA=
0-20 mA
0 m3/h
1000 m3/h
circul. act. normal operation =
circulation activity backwash =
circul. activity ECO Mode min =
ISO error -> circul. act. -> 100 % :
70 %
85 %
40 %
inactive
ORP -> circulation dependence:
circulation reduction =
circulation lowering time =
inactive
5%
20 s
SAVE
A0620
Fig. 92: Display: Configure DXMaA parameter recirculation
159
Configure
4.
Select the desired parameter using the vertical/horizontal
arrow keys and confirm by pressing the ENTER key
ð The following display appears:
System 1
parameter circulation
Range :
Value 0/4 mA=
Value 20 mA=
0-20 mA
0 m3/h
1000 m3/h
circul. act. normal operation =
cirlculation activity backwash =
circul. activity ECO mode min. =
ISO error -> circul. act. -> 100 % :
70 %
85 %
40 %
inactive
ORP-> cirlculation dependence:
inactive
cirlculation reduction =
cirlculation lowering time =
5%
20 s
circul. activity ECO mode min. =
040 %
Rng :
0 .. 100 %
A0619
Fig. 93: Parameter adjustment
5.
Select the desired value, e.g. 040 % using the vertical/hori‐
zontal arrow keys and confirm by pressing the ENTER key
ð The following display appears:
System 1
parameter circulation
Range :
Value 0/4 mA=
Value 20 mA=
0-20 mA
0 m3/h
1000 m3/h
circul. act. normal operation =
circulation activity backwash =
circul. activity ECO Mode min =
ISO error -> circul. act. -> 100 % :
70 %
85 %
40 %
inactive
ORP -> circulation dependence:
circulation reduction =
circulation lowering time =
inactive
5%
20 s
SAVE
A0620
Fig. 94: Display: Configure DXMaA parameter recirculation
You can carry this process out for all displayed parame‐
ters
160
Configure
6.
Further procedure:
n You can now repeat this process as often as necessary
for the selectable parameter
n or exit the menu by pressing the ESC key, so that the set
parameter is not adopted
n or you can press the F5 [SAVE]key, whereupon the set
parameters are adopted
F5 [SAVE]: The parameters are written to the controller.
ð After pressing the ESC or F5 key, the following display
appears:
System
1
A
DXMaA
R1 R2 R3 K1 K2 K3 Iout1 Iout2 Iout3 Iout4
Pump terminals
Recorder
R1: Acid pump
Iout1: pH Value
Max . freq.
= 180 Str/min
Iout2 :ORP value
K1 type
NO
Iout3 :free chlorine
R2: ORP pump
Iout4 :ph lower dosing
Max . freq.
= 180 Str/min
K2 type
NO
R3: Flocculant pump
= 180 Str/min
Max . freq.
Capacity=
1,40 l/h
K3 type
NO
Circulation
SERVICE CONFIG
DEFAULT SAVE
A0192
Fig. 95: Configuring module DXMaA
Allowable set values
Parameter
Factory setting
Possible value
Range
4-20 mA
0-20 mA/4-20 mA
Value 0/4 mA
0 m 3/h
0 ... 9,999 m 3/h
value 20 mA
1,000 m 3/h
0 ... 9,999 m 3/h
Circulation capacity normal operation
70 %
0 % ... 100 %
Backwashing circulation capacity
85 %
0 % ... 100 %
ECO circulation capacity
40 %
0 % ... 100 %
Circulation DIN error
Inactive
Active / inactive
ORP circulation
Inactive
Active / inactive
Circulation reduction
5%
0 % ... 100 %
Circulation reduction time
20 s
0 ... 9999 s
161
Configure
10.3
Configuring module DXMaP
P module (power supply module)
Pool 1
P
DXMaP
Relay outputs
P1
P1: Alarm horn
P2: PWM Acid pump
P3: PWM chlorine
P4: Enabling UV
P2 P3 P4
L
N
PE
Cycle time=
min.switch-on time=
Cycle time=
min.switch-on time=
DEFAULT
10.0
1.0
10.0
1.0
s
s
s
s
SAVE
A0193
Fig. 96: Configuring module DXMaP
The power relays P1 (alarm) from all P modules
always open and close together.
Pump terminals:
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
P1
Signal horn
P2
PWM acid
Solenoid valve or activation of pump (acid)
PWM alkaline
Solenoid valve or activation of pump (alkali)
free
not occupied
PWM alkaline
Solenoid valve or activation of pump (alkali)
PWM chlorine
Solenoid valve or activation of pump
(sodium hypochlorite)
PWM ORP
Solenoid valve or activation of pump
PWM acid
Solenoid valve or activation of pump (acid
P3
Remarks
PWM I2 mA
Backwashing
P4
free
not occupied
UV enable
Releases lock
PWM chlorine
Solenoid valve or activation of pump
(sodium hypochlorite)
PWM ORP
Solenoid valve or activation of pump
Heating enable
free
not occupied
The cycle times are to be taken into consideration when controlling solenoid valves (PWM = pulse width
modulation).
162
Configure
Terminals / adjustable variables
Increment
Cycle time
0.0...999.0 s
MIN ON-time
0.0..0.500.0 s
Remarks
The cycle times are to be taken into consideration when controlling solenoid valves (PWM = pulse width
modulation).
Solenoid valve relay
Solenoid
valve
Cycle
t on
min. time
t
Actuating
variable: 80 %
t on
= 0.80
Cycle
t
Actuating
variable: 50 %
t on
= 0.50
Cycle
on
off
Cycle
t on
on
off
A0025_GB
Fig. 97: Solenoid valves
The switching times of the DXCa (solenoid valve) depend on the
actuating variable and the ‘min. time’ (smallest permissible switchon time for the connected device). The actuating variable deter‐
mines the ratio ton/cycle and thus also the switching times (see
Fig. 97). The ‘min. time’ affects the switching times in two situa‐
tions:
Theoretical switching time < min. time
Cycle
Cycle
Cycle
min. time
on
theoretical
off
Cycle
Cycle
Cycle
t
min. time
on
actual
off
t
A0026_GB
Fig. 98: Theoretical switching time < min. time
DXCa does not switch on for a certain number of cycles until the
sum of the theoretical switching times exceeds ‘min. time’ . Then it
switches for the duration of this total time.
163
Configure
Theoretical switching time > (cycle min. time) and calculated switching
time < cycle
Cycle
Cycle
Cycle
min. time
on
theoretical
off
Cycle
Cycle
Cycle
t
min. time
on
actual
off
t
A0027_GB
Fig. 99: Theoretical switching time > (cycle - min. time) and calculated switching time < cycle
DXCa does not switch off for a certain number of cycles until the
differences between the cycle and the theoretical switching time
exceed ‘min. time’ .
10.4
Configuration for free chlorine module
Sensor CLE
From software version 3014, the free chlorine sensor
CLE3 can be set to a high measurement range of up to
100 ppm. As supplied, the measuring range is up to 10
ppm.
WARNING!
Danger of over-metering
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries.
Measure: If the high measuring range is activated or
deactivated, then the control parameters and alarm
threshold must be matched to the changed circum‐
stances.
164
Configure
Pool
l
P3
M A P Cl Cl R
free
High range: inactive
after activate or deactivate high range
set again all parameters(alarms, control...)
Soft. vers. 0967
HELP
HOME
Node - ID
15
Serial nr. 2004106040
PASSW
UPDATE
BUS
A0194
Fig. 100: Module Cl free
The file cards only show the software version, the CAN node
number (node ID) and the serial number (R. no. on the module
type plate), as the CAN connection of the chlorine sensor does not
have to be configured.
10.5
Configuration for total chlorine module
Sensor CTE
Pool
total
Display:
Cl total:
Cl comb.:
Soft. vers. 0967
HELP
HOME
l
P3
M A P Cl Cl R
not active
active
Node - ID
15
Serial no. 2004106040
PASSW
UPDATE
BUS
A0195
Fig. 101: Configuration for total chlorine module
The file cards only show the software version, the CAN node
number (node ID) and the serial number (R. no. on the module
type plate). In addition, under [Display] you can set which concen‐
tration the DXCa should display.
Adjustable variables Increment
Cl total
Remarks
not active
active
Cl bound
not active
active
165
Configure
10.6
Configuration for chlorine module
Sensor CGE
Pool
M A P Cl Cl R
Soft. vers. 0967
HELP
HOME
l
P3
Node - ID
15
Serial no. 2004106040
PASSW
UPDATE
BUS
A0196
Fig. 102: Configuration for chlorine module
The file cards only show the software version, the CAN node
number (node ID) and the serial number (R. no. on the module
type plate), as the CAN connection of the chlorine sensor does not
have to be configured.
166
Configure
10.7
Configuration of R module (control module for chlorine gas metering device)
Module DXMaR
Close
Control:
Open
Closed Opened
Position
Chlorine control
Closed
Position
A0197
Fig. 103: Configuration of R module (control module for chlorine
gas metering device)
Adjustable variable
Increment
Control
Chlorine control
Remarks
Redox control
Error message at the Dulcomarin
II
Cause
Remedy
Upper calibration point exceeded
Upper camshaft switch was not
triggered
Check mechanism in chlorine gas
metering device
Lower calibration point exceeded
Lower camshaft switch was not
triggered
Check mechanism in chlorine gas
metering device
Potentiometer not connected
No positioning check-back signal
to R module
Check the wiring of the potentiom‐
eter in the chlorine gas metering
device and the wiring in the R
module for correct connection
Incorrect direction of rotation
The motor direction of rotation
does not correspond with the
potentiometer direction of rotation
Check the wiring of the potentiom‐
eter and the relay control in the
chlorine gas metering device and
R module for correct connection
Position not reached
The chlorine gas metering device
has not reached the calculated
position
Voltage supply interrupted, check
wiring, excessive mechanism play
Communication time-out
The M module fails to answer
within the allowed time window
Module has not answered, check
BUS cabling
Lower stop too low
Camshaft switch was not triggered Check mechanism, fasten cam
Upper stop too high
Camshaft switch was not triggered Check mechanism, fasten cam
Calibration cycles unequal
There are differences between the Check mechanism, replace cam if
two calibration cycles
necessary
Calibration points outside permis‐
sible range
Lower point < 2 %, upper > 98 %
Adjust cam for limit switch.
167
Configure
10.8
Configuration for P1 module (metering pump module)
CAN-Beta®
Bus-connected pump
Chlorine pump
DEFAULT
SAVE
A0198
Fig. 104: Configuration for P1 module (metering pump module)
Pump utilisation
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
P1
Acid pump
for acid
Chlorine pump
Flocculent pump
Pump pH-raise
for alkali
Redox pump
Chlorine pump
Chlorine standby pump
only with I module and chlorine sensor
Pump NH4OH
only with I module and chlorine sensor
Redox pump
Pump I2
Pump F-
only if configured on I module
Pump ClO2
only if configured on I module, without chlorine sensor
Pump H2O2
only if configured on I module, without chlorine sensor
free
If there are numerous pumps connected to the CAN bus, a file card is displayed for each pump: P1, P2 and
P3.
The file card also displays the current values for the following variables:
Variable
Increment
Remarks
Pump output
0 ... 100 %
Data about the current, relative pump output
Stroke length
0 ... 100 %
The metering accuracy reduces under 30%
Filling level
> 10 %
Filling level OK
168
Configure
Variable
Increment
Remarks
< 10 %
Prepare container exchange
Container empty
Exchange container
Power
Pump status
Maximum mathematical metering output of the pump
type for the set stroke length, 100% stroke rate and
1.5 bar
OFF
Multifunctional switch on Beta set to STOP
ON
Multifunctional switch on Beta not set to STOP
Bus
Multifunctional switch on Beta set to BUS
Manual
Multifunctional switch on Beta not set to BUS
Calibrate pump!
Calibration OK!
CAN pumps must also be assigned to the pool even for systems
with only a single pool. The metering output curves are stored for
each stroke length at a constant back pressure of 1.5 bar in each
Beta/4-CANopen. In the event that the stroke length varies by
more than ±10 %, the DXCa signals an alarm and a message is
shown on the display. However, the pump continues to operate.
After the settings are stored (calibration), the message disappears
and the DXCa will match the pump output to the new metering
output curve.
Chlorine standby pump
The DXCa can control up to 4 metering pumps with CAN bus con‐
nection. It is possible to configure a metering pump for chlorine
next to the main chlorine pump as a standby pump.
In this case, the screen writer must be activated and an SD card
must be inserted, as this stores the operating states in an event file
on the SD card (see supplementary instructions screen writer).
The following situations cause switchover to the standby pump:
n Fault in the main chlorine pump
n Chlorine chemical reservoir on the main pump is empty
n The multifunctional switch on the main pump is set to ‘Stop’ .
However, a power failure or disconnection of the bus connection to
the main pump will not cause switchover to the standby pump.
Pump NH4OH
In the event that CAN-pumps are configured for chlorine regulation,
then a pump can also be configured via "Pump NH4OH" for pur‐
poses of chloramination. In order to do so, an ammonia solution is
metered in parallel to the chlorine solution. In order to achieve the
correct stoichiometry, the concentration of the ammonia solution
and the stroke length of the ammonia pump must be matched to
the chlorine concentration in the treated water.
169
Configure
10.9
G module (limit value module) configuration
Module DXMaG
Relais outputs
Alarm source relay1
Sampling water
pHmin
pHmax
Clmin
Clmax
free
free
Delay=30 min
norm. Inactive
Alarm source relay2
Pool
free
free
free
free
free
free
Delay= 0 min
norm. Inactive
A0199
Fig. 105: G module (limit value module) configuration
Variable
Increment
Remarks
Alarm sources
Pool
With ‘Pool’ it is possible to select all alarm sources.
Only for alarm source 1
Sampling water
Sample water monitoring
pH min
pH max
Cl min
Cl max
I1 min
I1 max
I2 min
I2 max
I3min
I3 max
free
Delay (error)
0 ... 999 min
P1 type
norm. Inactive (NO) Power relay P1 all
norm. active (NC)
P2 type
P module
norm. Inactive (NO) Power relay P2 all
norm. active (NC)
P module
It is possible to select up to 7 alarm sources per power relay (the alarm sources are then OR linked).
170
Configure
10.10 I module (current input module) configuration
Module DXMaI
Pool
XE2
123
+24V IN GND
XE1
12
IN GND
Flow
EDIT 1111
Temp
0-20mA
4-20mA
4-20mA
K1:
Sampling water
K1 Type:
NO
Soft. vers. 0967
HELP
OPTION
XE3
123
+24V IN GND
0.0 - 100.0 m3/h
0.00 - 27.0 xyz
0.0 - 100.0 °C
K2:
K2 Type:
free
NO
Node - ID
15
Serial no. 2004106040
PASSW
UPDATE
BUS
A0269
Fig. 106: Flow configuration
Adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Measured variable
Sampling water
Only on K1
Pause
Only on K2
Flow Q
only on ‘ I in 1’ ; can be used for measured variables ‘I
in 2’ as interference value
Turbidity
only on ‘ I in 1’ or ‘ I in 3’
Conductivity
only on ‘I in 2’
F-
only on ‘I in 2’
O2
only on ‘I in 2’
ClO2 -
only on ‘I in 2’ or ‘ I in 3’
H2O2
only on ‘I in 2’
UV
only on ‘ I in 3’
Temp.
only on ‘ I in 3’
PES
only on ‘ I in 3’ ; peracetic acid
Range
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
Unit / adjustable variables
Increment
Flow Q
m3/h
Remarks
l/h
Turbidity
NTU
FNU
FTU
FAU
171
Configure
Unit / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
EBC
Conductivity
μS/cm
mS/cm
S/cm
UV
W/m2
mW/cm2
Others
mg/l
For F-, O2, ClO2, ClO2 -, H2O2, PES
ppm
Adjustable varia‐
bles
Decimal points
Increment
Value range for
0/4 mA
20 mA
0
0...9000
0...9999
1
0...900,0
0...999,9
2
0...90,00
0...99,99
3
0...9,000
0...9,999
Unit / adjustable variables
Increment
Remarks
Value 0/4 mA
0...9999
for 0 decimal points
0...999,9
for 1 decimal points
0...99,99
for 2 decimal points
0...9,999
for 3 decimal points
0...9999
for 0 decimal points
0...999,9
for 1 decimal points
0...99,99
for 2 decimal points
0...9,999
for 3 decimal points
Value 20 mA
Configuration of measured variables
The I module can be used to process signals from sensors or devices which supply an mA standard signal
for the following measured variables:
Measured variable
Sensor or device
Fluoride (F-)
Transducer 4-20 mA FP V1
dissolved oxygen (O2)
DULCOMETER® controller type D1C for dissolved oxygen
Chlorine dioxide (ClO2
DULCOTEST® amperometric sensor
Chlorite (ClO2 -)
DULCOTEST® amperometric sensor
Ammonia (NH3)
Transducer 4-20 mA A V1
172
Configure
Measured variable
Sensor or device
Hydrogen peroxide (H2O2)
DULCOTEST® amperometric sensor
Peracetic acid (PES)
DULCOTEST® amperometric sensor
Conductive conductivity
DMT transducer
Temperature
Transducer 4-20 mA Pt 100 V1
Flow
Suitable third-party device
UV intensity (UV)
Suitable third-party device
Turbidity
Suitable third-party device
Displays and limit values
The signals are displayed and can be monitored by means of limit
values (PARAM - AL).
Temperature compensation
For fluoride you can select temperature compensation under
PARAM - MESS. In order to do so, you have to connect a tempera‐
ture sensor to input ‘ I in 3’ .
Configure
All of the selectable measured variables are subdivided over 3
lines which can be selected by means of the arrow keys. The sen‐
sors for the measured variables in line 1 must be connected to ter‐
minal XE1, the sensors for the measured variables in row 2 must
be connected to terminal XE2, etc. .
Configuring a sensor or a device:
1.
Select the correct line corresponding to the terminal (arrow
key UP/DOWN; for KE1 - row 1, etc. ) and press the ENTER
button
ð A display appears for selecting the measured variables
2.
Press the ENTER button
3.
Select the correct measured variable and press the ENTER
key
4.
Accept the settings with F5 ACCEPT
ð A progress bar appears. Default settings will now be
loaded for the new measured variable. Possibly change
certain parameters in the configuration:
5.
Select under ‘Range’ the correct range for the standard
signal
6.
Select the next parameter block with the RIGHT key
7.
Select under ‘Unit’ the correct unit
8.
Select under ‘Decimal points’ the desired number of decimal
places after the decimal point that should be displayed.
9.
Select the next parameter block with the RIGHT key
10.
Under ‘0/4 mA’ set the correct zero point for the measured
variable.
11.
Under ‘20 mA’ set the correct maximum value for the meas‐
ured variable.
12.
Store all of the settings with F5 SAVE
13.
Press the enter button in the following dialog for ‘Yes’
173
Configure
14.
Check whether there are still parameters in the PARAM
menu that have to be matched up, such as alarms or tem‐
perature compensation.
ð You must now calibrate the new measured variable.
Editing the names of the mA inputs
System
XE2
123
+24V IN GND
Input 0/4-20 mA
Measured variable:
Measured variable name:
Unit name:
EDIT
1111
xyz
Edit the name of the measured variables and
the unit!
ACCEPT
A0334
Fig. 107: Editing the names of the mA inputs
The names of all three mA inputs as shown in the display can be
edited.
Unit / adjustable variables
Increment
Measured variable
EDIT
Remarks
no sensor
F-
Fluoride (F-)
O2
dissolved oxygen (O2)
ClO2
Chlorine dioxide (ClO2
ClO2-
Chlorite (ClO2 -)
H2O2
Hydrogen peroxide (H2O2)
NH3
Ammonia (NH3)
Name measured variable
freely editable to 4
places
All numerals, letters and special characters are avail‐
able
Name unit
freely editable to 4
places
All numerals, letters and special characters are avail‐
able
174
Maintenance
11
Maintenance
Maintenance work DXCa
Maintenance timer
The DXCa is equipped with a maintenance timer. This
timer serves to indicate pending maintenance tasks.
In this case, the contact details of the authorised engi‐
neer are also displayed.
INFO Maintenance timer reminder
Maintenance due!
Contact data:
Company:
Name:
Landline:
Mobile:
Musterfrima GmbH & Co. KGaA
Musti Mustermann
+49 0 6221 XXXXXXX
+49 0 177 XXXXXXX
F1 Confirm service!
ESC Remind again
A0263
Fig. 108: INFO Maintenance timer reminder
F1 Confirm
service!:
ESC remind
again:
11.1
Confirms the service work carried out and reset
the maintenance timer (password required)
Suppresses the message. The message is dis‐
played again after one week.
Configure maintenance timer
PLOT WEB
SRV
Maintenance timer

Company:
Musterfirma GmbH & Co. KGaA
Name:
Musti Mustermann
Landline:
+49 0 6221 XXXXXXX
Mobile:
+49 0 177 XXXXXXX
Interval:
12 months
Last maintenance on 30.02.2009
0
Valid for the entire system.
Sound off
RESET
RESTART
A0262
Fig. 109: Configure maintenance timer
Maintenance timer configuration
1.
Press the F4 button (CONFIG) in the central menu item
ð The configuration menu appears
175
Maintenance
2.
Press the F2 key (OPTION)
ð The options menu appears
3.
Select the file card [SRV] with the horizontal arrow keys
4.
Press the ENTER button
5.
Enter the password [PW Installation] on
ð The display with the configurable parameters appears.
6.
Select the parameter which you want to change with the hori‐
zontal arrow keys.
ð The selected parameter will be shown with a black back‐
ground.
7.
Press the ENTER button
SRV
Maintenance timer
Company:
Name:
Landline:
Mobile:
Interval:

Musterfirma GmbH & Co. KGaA
Musti Mustermann
+49 0 6221 XXXXXXX
+49 0 177 XXXXXXX
12 months
Company:
Musterfirma GmbH & Co. KGaA
A0268
Fig. 110: Maintenance timer change display
8.
The parameter to be changed appears at the bottom lefthand side
9.
Adjust the parameter with the horizontal and vertical arrow
keys
ð Confirm the changes with the ENTER button
10.
Repeat the process from point 6 until all of the respective
parameters have been changed
11.
Press F5 (SAVE) in order to save all of the changes
12.
You can return to the central menu item by pressing the ESC
key
Adjustable variables Increment
Remarks
Interval
Switches the main‐
tenance timer off
Inactive
1 month
3 months
6 months
9 months
12 months
176
Troubleshooting
12
Troubleshooting
The number shown before the error message on Dulco
Net indicates the pool number (system number) of the
respective pool (system).
You can display the pH value, the sensor current and
the temperature at the time of pressing the button with
F4 (MESS).
In the event that an error message is shown when cali‐
brating a chlorine sensor, you can call up detailed
information with F3 INFO. This data will also help
when discussing the matter with a technical consultant.
Error messages central menu item and remedies
Fault Messages
Reaction DXCa and remedy
Fault sample water
Metering on basic load, measured values incorrect, check sample
water flow
pH sensor defective
Metering on basic load, measured values incorrect, replace sensor
pH value too low
Metering on basic load, locate cause of fault, possibly switch over to
manual metering
pH–value too high
Metering on basic load, locate cause of fault, possibly switch over to
manual metering
pH-input short circuited
Metering on basic load, measured values incorrect, identify cause
(incorrect connection)
pH sensor not connected
Metering on basic load, measured values incorrect, identify cause
(incorrect connection
Fault pump pH lower
Check container, check pump, vent, measured value OK
pH lower container empty
Replace container, vent, measured value OK
Fault pump pH-raise
Check container, check pump, vent, measured value OK
pH raise container empty
Replace container, vent, measured value OK
Redox sensor defective
Measured values incorrect, metering on basic load (if redox control
active)
Redox value too low
Measured values incorrect, metering on basic load (if redox control
active)
Redox value too high
Measured values incorrect, metering on basic load (if redox control
active)
Redox input short circuited
Measured values incorrect, metering on basic load (if redox control
active)
Redox sensor not connected
Measured values incorrect, metering on basic load (if redox control
active
Free chlorine CLE - sensor faulty
Measured value incorrect, replace sensor
Free chlorine CLE - value too low
Metering on basic load, locate cause of fault, possibly switch over to
manual metering
177
Troubleshooting
Fault Messages
Reaction DXCa and remedy
Free chlorine CLE - value too high
Metering on basic load, locate cause of fault, possibly switch over to
manual metering
Free chlorine CLE - sensor not con‐ Connect sensor
nected
Free chlorine CLE - correction temp Metering on basic load, measured values incorrect, replace sensor
missing
Free chlorine CLE - correction
value missing
No pH-sensor, switch pH-correction to manual pH
Fault chlorine pump
Check container, check pump, vent, measured value OK
Chlorine container empty
Replace container, vent, measured value OK
Total chlorine CTE - sensor faulty
Measured value incorrect, replace sensor
Bound chlorine - value too low
Recalibrate the chlorine sensor
Bound chlorine - value too high
Fresh water supply required
Total chlorine CTE - correction
temp missing
Measured value incorrect, replace sensor
Total chlorine CTE - correction
value pH missing
No pH-sensor, switch pH-correction to manual
Total chlorine CTE - sensor not
connected
Connect sensor
Temperature - sensor defective
Measured value incorrect, replace PT1000 (100)
Temperature - value too low
Identify cause
Temperature - value too high
Identify cause
Temperature - input short circuited
Metering incorrect, identify cause (incorrect connection)
Temperature - sensor not con‐
nected
Metering incorrect, identify cause (incorrect connection)
Fault flocculent pump
Check container, check pump, vent
Flocculent container empty
Replace container, vent
DXMaM module bus error
Contact customer service
DXMaA module bus error
Contact customer service
DXMaP module bus error
Contact customer service
Free chlorine CLE - sensor bus
error
Contact customer service
Total chlorine CLE - sensor bus
error
Contact customer service
Pump MANUAL
Manual is not allowed. Pump stopped (it will run again if discon‐
nected from bus)
Pump STOP
Manual is not allowed. Pump stopped
Pump TEST
Manual is not allowed. Pump runs
Pump stroke length adjustment
Stroke length adjusted >10 %
Servo motor not ready
Basic load? For further information see "Specific errors..." Ä ‘Specific
178
servomotor errors in file card "Operating errors"’ Table on page 179
Troubleshooting
Error messages in the fields for measured variables and remedies
Fault Messages
Reaction DXCa and remedy
Sensor fault
Identify cause, replace sensor if necessary
Calibrate sensor
Calibrate sensor
Rectify servo motor fault
Write down the servo motor calibration data prior to
calling ProMinent Service: In order to do so, in the file
card ‘R module’ press the F1 key (HELP) - the table
containing the calibrated values appears
1.
In the event the the error message ‘ Servomotor: not ready’
appears in the permanent display, press the F4 key (FAULT)
in the R module file card
ð ‘Operating error’ appears.
2.
Make a note of the specific error message for the servomotor
3.
Rectify the fault in accordance with Ä ‘Specific servomotor
errors in file card "Operating errors"’ Table on page 179 .
4.
Press the F2 key (RESET) in order to exit the menu and
acknowledge the fault.
Specific servomotor errors in file card "Operating errors"
Error message
Cause
Remedy
Upper calibration point exceeded
Upper camshaft switch has not
triggered
Check mechanism in chlorine gas
metering unit
Lower calibration point exceeded
Lower camshaft switch has not
triggered
Check mechanism in chlorine gas
metering unit
Potentiometer not connected
No positioning check-back signal
to R module
Check the wiring of the potentiom‐
eter in the chlorine gas metering
unit and the wiring in the R
module for correct connection
Incorrect direction of rotation
The servomotor direction of rota‐
tion does not correspond with the
potentiometer direction of rotation
Check the wiring of the potentiom‐
eter and the relay control in the
chlorine gas metering unit and the
wiring in the R module for correct
connection
Position not reached
The servomotor has not achieved
the calculated position
Voltage feed interrupted, check
wiring, excessive mechanism play
Communication time-out
The R module fails to answer
within the specified period of time
Check BUS-connection for M
module
Heartbeat time-out
Module not correctly connected
Check BUS cabling
Lower stop too low
Camshaft switch has not triggered Check mechanism, fasten cam
Upper stop too high
Camshaft switch has not triggered Check mechanism, fasten cam
179
Troubleshooting
Error message
Cause
Remedy
Calibration cycles unequal
There are differences between the Check mechanism, replace cam if
two calibration cycles
necessary
Motor too fast
Potentiometer or mechanism
jumps
Replace potentiometer or mecha‐
nism
Metering characteristics for various controller states
metering
STOP
START
Param‐
eter
Sample
water
Menu
Error
Pause
contact
Sample
water
Display
metering
metering
Actuating
variable
Remarks
Error
Control:
OFF
Controller
60 %
X
metering
0%
for all
measured
variables
of the dis‐
played
pool
0%
for a
measured
variable
OFF
X
metering
OFF
X
metering
0%
OFF
Error
message
X
metering
0%
Pause
X
metering
10%
Manual
man.
metering
20 %
X
man.
metering
Basic
load
Configu‐
rable
Config‐
ured
value
Configu‐
rable
0%
for all
measured
variables
of the dis‐
played
pool
0%
for a
measured
variable
OFF
X
man.
metering
OFF
180
Troubleshooting
metering
STOP
START
Param‐
eter
Sample
water
Menu
Error
Pause
contact
Sample
water
Display
metering
man.
metering
0%
Remarks
Error
Control:
OFF
X
OFF
Error
message
X
X
man.
metering
0%
man.
metering
Config‐
ured
value
Configu‐
rable
Left LED (device LED)
Colour
Flash code
Cause
Consequence
Remedy
red
illuminated
any
Warning or acknowl‐
edged fault mes‐
sages
For troubleshooting
see Ä ‘Error mes‐
sages central menu
item and rem‐
edies’ Table
on page 177
red
flashing
unacknowledged
error message
Alarm
Acknowledge
alarm, rectify fault
green
illuminated
No device error
pending
Normal Mode
-
DXCa
Right LED (CANopen LED)
Colour
Flash code
Cause
Consequence
Remedy
green
illuminated
Bus status
Normal bus mode
-
OPERATIONAL
green
flashing
Bus status
PRE-OPERA‐
TIONAL
currently no meas‐
Wait briefly
ured value communi‐
cation
Ignore the flash codes for approx. 2 minutes after connecting the
DXCa. Acknowledge possibly occurring alarms.
If the LEDs keep repeating the same sequence of flash codes,
then the bus must be supplying too many devices. In this case, add
an (additional) N or P module into the bus (see part 1 of the oper‐
ating instructions).
Contact customer service in the event of all other flash codes.
181
Troubleshooting
Flash code LEDs DXCa (central unit
DXCa)
Left LED (device LED)
Colour
Flash code
Cause
Consequence
Remedy
red
illuminated
Electronic fault
Sensor defective
Return the sensor
or contact customer
service
red
flashing*
Start-up phase
no measured value
communication
Wait briefly
red
Single flashing**
Calibration is faulty
Measured value is
incorrect
Re-calibrate
red
Double flashing***
0 ppm > measured
value
Measured value too
high / too low
Check the chlorine
content of the
sample water
Limit value transgres‐
sion
Clarify cause; poss.
set new values
> 10 ppm
Reading ≠ limit value
No pH correction value pH correction value
transferred
missing
Check parameters
and configuration.
Check pH sensor
green
illuminated
No device error
pending
Normal mode sensor
-
-
off
No supply voltage
Sensor not func‐
tioning
Check cable con‐
nections
*
**
***
A0203
Fig. 111: Flash code
Flash code LEDs DXCa (central unit
DXCa)
Right LED (CANopen LED)
Colour
Flash code
Cause
Consequence
Remedy
red
any
Bus-error
no measured value
communication
Contact customer
service
green
illuminated
Bus status
Normal bus mode
-
Currently no meas‐
ured value communi‐
cation
Bus-error
OPERATIONAL
green
flashing
Bus status
PRE-OPERATIONAL
Ignore the flash codes for approx. 2 minutes after connecting the
sensor. Acknowledge possibly occurring alarms.
If the LEDs keep repeating the same sequence of flash codes,
then the bus must be supplying too many devices. In this case, add
an (additional) N or P module into the bus (see part 1 of the oper‐
ating instructions).
Contact customer service in the event of all other flash codes.
182
Troubleshooting
LEDs on the power supply module
The two LEDS (LED 1 and LED 2) (see power supply module sup‐
plementary instructions) indicate the load of the 24V power supply
for the CAN bus.
Flash code LEDs power supply monitoring DXCa (N and P module)
Mode
LED 1
LED 2
(H2, power)
(H3, power)
Normal
off
Limit load
red
Overload / short cir‐ red, flashing
cuit
Power
Remarks
green
< 1.1 A
All OK
off
> 1.1 A
Insert another
power supply
module into the
loop
off
> 1.35 A
Check wiring
183
Glossary of technical terms
13
Glossary of technical terms
Abbreviations for control-relevant
values:
x: Control variable, actual value e.g. pH value)
KPR: Proportional coefficient
xp: 100 %/KPR (reciprocal proportional coefficient)
Xmax: Maximum actual value of control (e.g. pH 14)
y: Actuating variable (e.g. pulse frequency - pump)
Yh: Actuating range (e.g. 180 pulses/min)
yp: Actuating variable of proportional controller [%]
w: Primary variable or set point (e.g. pH 7.2)
e: Control difference, e = w-x
xw: Control deviation, xw = x-w
TN: Reset time of I-control [s]
TV: Derivative time of D-control [s]
Access code (password)
Access to the device can be granted in steps by setting up
an access code. Refer also to: Ä Chapter 5.2 ‘Access code
(password)’ on page 70
Actuating variable
An actuating variable is considered to be the value (e.g. fre‐
quency, mA signal) that the controller emits to the actuator
e.g. a metering pump in order to achieve the set point again
(at actuating variable 100% a pump will run at full power).
Additive interference variable
The additive interference variable switch is suitable for
metering tasks, in which the metering volume is dependent
in the first place on the interference variable (e.g. flow) and
requires only minimal recorrection. This nature of interfer‐
ence variable processing is used, for example, in the chlori‐
nation of water with approximately constant chlorine uptake.
An interference value-related base load metering value will
be added or subtracted from the first "determined actuating
variable" from the controller. The actuating variable can be a
maximum of 100 %.
Actuating variable to actuator [%] = (recorded actuating vari‐
able [%] +max. additive actuating variable [%]*current inter‐
ference variable [mA]) / nominal interference variable [mA]
Legends: The maximum additive interference variable indi‐
cates which maximum interference variable is to be added
(where current interference variable = nominal interference
variable). For further legends see ‘multiplicative interference
value’ .
CAUTION: If there is no current interference variable (flow =
0), but a recorded actuating variable of the PID control, then
the final actuating variable corresponds to the recorded
actuating variable of the PID control. If a current interference
variable (flow = 0) is given and the detected interference
value of the PID controller is the same ‘0’ , then the final
actuating variable will correspond to the 2nd term from the
above formula:
(max. additive actuating variable * current interference variable)
/ nominal interference variable
Calibration
Transducers require calibration (alignment of the zero point
and slope).
For 1-point calibration, this is undertaken with a buffer solu‐
tion pH 7. I.e. only the zero point is calibrated in this case.
184
Glossary of technical terms
For 2-point calibration it is necessary to select a second
value in order to calibrate the slope: e.g. pH 4 or pH 10. The
second value is dependent on the actual measurement
range (alkali or acid).
In swimming pool technology it is sufficient to carry out a
zero point calibration (at pH 7) and merely to check the
sensor function with a buffer solution at pH 4 or pH 10. As
the measurement is undertaken around the zero point, mod‐
erate errors in the slope are immaterial
The slope of the sensor can change as a result of aging and
soiling.
checkout time
CAUTION: The function ‘checkout time control’ can be con‐
fused with ‘Control time of reading’ on the DULCOMETER®
D1C!
The function ‘checkout time control’ offers a protection
option against the risk of over-metering. It switches the
respective control circuit to metering 0% after expiration of
the checkout time and triggers an error message if:
On a pure P control: the P proportion of the actuating vari‐
able is greater than 40%.
for PID control: the PID actuating variable Y is greater than
90%.
Press the start / stop button twice in order to restart the
respective control circuit and to delete the error message for
the control circuit.
Control equations:
Normal
A measured value is compared with a set point. In the event
of a control difference (difference of set point minus actual
value), an actuating value is determined which will counter
the control difference.
Controller
The DXCa controller be used as a P-, PI-, or PID-controller.
This depends on the settings of the control parameters.
The actuating variable is calculated once per second.
This controller cannot be used in control circuits that require
quicker reactions to control deviations (less than 30 sec‐
onds).
The control function (output of actuating variables) can be
switched off by means of the Pause control input.
Actuating variable calculation is resumed as soon as Pause
is ceased.
Control variable (measured value,
actual value)
The control variable is the variable which is to be measured
and recorded (e.g. pH value, redox value).
Delay (alarm limits)
In the event that the alarm threshold is violated, the DXCa
will trigger an error message only after the configured delay
set here. This means that brief alarm threshold violations will
not trigger an error message.
Delay (contact)
As soon as a contact is connected to a contact input K of the
M module, the DXCa sets the actuating outputs to ‘0’ for as
long as the contact is made and for a subsequent delay
period (contact) (if it has been configured). While the contact
is made, the DXCa suppresses error treatment. As soon as
the contact is opened, the DXCa commences with error
treatment again - after the delay period has expired (contact)
(if it has been configured). Once the contact has been
opened, the actuating outputs remain - for the duration of the
delay (contact) - at ‘0’ . The delay (contact) has to be set in
185
Glossary of technical terms
such a way that, for example, during this time sample water
with the current concentration relative to the process flows to
the sensor. The delay (contact) from "pause control" has a
higher priority that the delay (contact) from ‘ Sampling
water’ . The 0/4-20 mA outputs (standard signal outputs) for
the reading or correction value are unaffected by this func‐
tion.
Delay (error)
In the event of a limit value violation, the limit value relay of
the G module will trip after the delay period entered here has
elapsed. This means that brief limit value violations will not
trigger an error message.
Determining the checkout time
Prerequisites:
The system has achieved the set points for chlorine concen‐
tration (0.45 mg/l) and pH value.
Stop the system using the Start/Stop key.
Wait until the chlorine concentration has dropped to 0.1 mg/l.
Restart the controller using the Start/Stop key.
Measure the time needed until the set point has been ach‐
ieved.
Enter this time multiplied by 1.5 as the checkout time for
chlorine concentration.
If the pump capacities are correctly selected, then this
checkout time can also be entered for the pH value.
Eco!Mode
‘Eco!Mode’ enables a 2nd set of parameters to be tempora‐
rily activated in order to save power. This can, for example,
be carried out synchronously with a reduction in the circu‐
lating output. As soon as a contact is switched on contact
input K3 of the M module, ‘Eco!Mode’ is activated or deacti‐
vated. Eco!Mode is available for all M module measured var‐
iables, if they are controlled:
pH
Redox
chlorine free
chlorine bound
Temperature
Flocculent
As soon as the 2nd set of parameters is activated, the cen‐
tral menu item indicates a green ECO identifier.
Interference value
The controller can process a signal from a flow measure‐
ment on the analogue input ‘I in 1’ of the DXMaI module as
an interference value for the controlled measured variables
of the I module. This interference value influences the
actuating variables calculated by the controller in relation to
the external signal.
Depending on the nature of the effect on the actuating vari‐
able, it is referred to either as a
multiplicative interference variable (flow-proportional effect)
or an
additive interference variable (interference variable-related
effect)
When ‘Commissioning’ the zero point signal of the flow
gauge has to be checked without flow (must be ≥ 0).
186
Glossary of technical terms
Limit values
‘min. limit’ means that the limit criterion has been trans‐
gressed by dropping below the lower limit
‘max. limit’ means that the limit criterion has been trans‐
gressed by exceeding the upper limit
Multiplicative interference variable
This type of interference variable processing is used, for
example, with flow neutralisation. The actuating variables
determined by the controller are multiplied by a factor F. The
factor lies in the range of 0 ≤ F ≤ 1 (0 ~= 0 %, 1 ~= 100 %).
The actuating variable can therefore be a maximum of 100
%.
Actuating variable to
actuator [%] = recorded actuating variable [%] * current inter‐
ference variable [mA] / nominal interference variable [mA]
A ‘current interference variable’ greater than or equal to the
‘Interference variable nominal value’ does not affect the
control variable.
Legends: The determined actuating variable is the actuating
variable which is issued by the controller without an interfer‐
ence value. The nominal interference variable limits the
range that can be used.
Example: A flow meter is used, for example, which can
measure a maximum flow of Q = 250 m3/h. The analogue
output of the flow meter supplies a signal corresponding to 4
mA = 0 m3/h, 20 mA = 250 m3/h. The maximum flow that
can be achieved in the application is however only 125 m3/h.
If the standard signal-output signal of the flow meter is now
not adjusted to the 4...20 mA range of the D1C (possible
with the majority of flow meters), then the standard signal at
125 m3/h is only12 mA. Is this value then to be entered into
the ‘interference value menu?’ Enter under ‘Interference
variable nominal value’ .
The interference variable is the current analogue flow, which
the flow meter supplies. The final actuating variable is trans‐
ferred to the actuator.
The multiplicative interference value is not designed to per‐
manently switch off the actuating variable! In this case you
should realise deactivation via the pause function.
Pause
When the Pause contact is closed, the DXCa sets all
actuating outputs to ‘0’ for as long as the pause contact is
closed. While the Pause contact is closed, the DXC records
the P-proportion in the background.
pH value
pH-value refers to a measurement for the concentration
(activity) of hydrogen ions or, put simply, is a measurement
for the acidity or alkalinity of water.
The pH value is of great importance in terms of swimming
pool water treatment. It influences:
the degree of disinfection: the disinfection effect of chlorine
reduces as the pH value rises
the flocculent: every flocculent has only a certain pH range
in which it is able to work optimally
the corrosiveness: the corrosiveness of the water increases
as the pH value drops. Mechanical materials will corrode
The skin tolerance: The acidic protection layer of our skin is
pH 5.5. Excessive pH values in the swimming pool water
attack the protective layers of skin and this leads to skin irri‐
tation.
187
Glossary of technical terms
An excessively low pH value increases the likelihood of trichloramine formation. This can lead to eye irritation
(inflamed, stringing eyes) and mucous membrane irritation
(e.g. coughing). For these reasons, the pH value of swim‐
ming pool water should always be in the range between 6.5
and 7.6 (optimal: pH-optimum of the flocculent used). In pri‐
vate swimming pools, where generally no flocculants are
uses, the pH value should lie between 7 and 7.2.
On the other hand, the pH measurement is influenced by the
following factors:
chlorination: all chlorine products will change the pH value
the water distribution: carbon dioxide (CO2) outgassing from
the pool water will raise the pH value. This effect can be
amplified by an unfavourable water distribution or by aera‐
tors, fungi or similar.
For these reasons, the pH value must be constantly meas‐
ured and controlled.
Redox voltage
The redox voltage is dependent on the sum total of reductive
and oxidising substances contained in the water. It repre‐
sents a measurement for the disinfecting efficiency of the
water. The higher the concentration of oxidising substances,
the greater the redox voltage (oxidation = disinfection).
In a swimming pool, hypochlorous acid is the determining
oxidising substance. Contaminating substances are mini‐
mised.
pH-value and temperature have the following influences on
the redox value:
Increasing pH-value--> decreasing redox voltage
Increasing temperature--> increasing redox voltage
A stable pH value is extremely important!
There is no unequivocal relationship between disinfectant
concentration and redox voltage. At a redox voltage of 750
mV it is assured that introduced microorganisms are
destroyed or made inactive in a matter of seconds. At values
lower than 600 mV the disinfection period can amount to
minutes or hours.
Set point
Set point refers to a value which is to be maintained at a
constant level by means of the controllers in a process.
Slope / sensitivity
This value is, for example, given in mV/pH at 25 °C.
Types of controller:
P controller:
Is used in controlled systems which work in an integrated
manner (e.g. batch neutralisation).
PI controller:
Can be used in non-integrated controlled systems (e.g. flow
neutralisation).
PID controller:
Is used in controlled systems where peaks occur that have
to be compensated for.
With dead zone:
With dead zone control (neutral zone control) two set points
have to be specified. If the reading is located within the dead
zone, then no control variable will be issued.
Set point 2 must be greater than set point 1!
188
Glossary of technical terms
Manual
ATTENTION: The controller will not exit this mode automati‐
cally. Manual mode may only be used for commissioning
and for test purposes.
There is no control. An actuating variable will be specified
manually:
Actuating variable: 0...+100 % (actuating output rise active)
Actuating variable: -100...0 % (actuating output lower active)
This function is used to monitor actuators.
Additive basic load:
A basic load is added to the current actuating variable. The
additive basic load means that, for example, constant attri‐
tion can be compensated for.
YTot = Yp + 15 % (additive basic load = 15 %)
Example 1 (one-way control): YTot = 85 % + 15 %; YTot = 100
%
Example 2 (one-way control): YTot = -75 % + 15 %; YTot = -60
%
xp value
This value influences the proportional control behaviour. For
example, an xp of 1.4 pH with a deviation of +1.4 pH leads
to an actuating variable of -100% or at a deviation of -1.4 pH
to an actuating variable of +100%. In other words, if a devia‐
tion occurs to the size of xp, then an actuating variable of
100% follows.
Zero point
This refers to, for example, the voltage that a pH sensor
emits at pH value 7. The zero point of the sensor can
change as a result of aging and soiling.
The zero point of pH sensors is theoretically 0 mV. In prac‐
tical terms, a zero point between -30 mV and +30 mV is
acceptable for good sensor operation. New sensors have a
zero point tolerance of max. ±30 mV.
189
Glossary of technical terms
190
Index
14
Index
"
"Calibrate" pump.................................................. 75
A
Access code level................................................ 71
Access to the submenus...................................... 87
Actuating outputs to "0"........................................ 88
Adding a new module........................................... 72
Areas protected by access codes........................ 71
Arrow key DOWN................................................. 69
Arrow key UP....................................................... 69
Assign a pump number.................................. 75, 76
Assign a pump to a system (pool, filtration cir‐
cuit, etc.)......................................................... 75, 76
Assign the pump a purpose................................. 76
B
Blue chevron........................................................ 80
Buffer detection.................................................... 92
Buffer solution................................................ 90, 92
Buffer solutions ................................................... 89
Buttons and displays............................................ 68
C
Calibrate pump .................................................... 76
Calibrate R module.............................................. 78
Calibration menu.................................................. 79
Calibration menu for all measured variables........ 85
Call up help function............................................. 86
CANopen.............................................................. 67
Central menu item................................................ 79
Changing numerical values.................................. 69
Changing the language........................................ 71
Commissioning a pump........................................ 76
Commissioning a stored CAN-Beta pump........... 76
Commissioning CAN-Beta pump................... 74, 76
Configuration menu.............................................. 79
Configuration menu, first menu item.................... 86
Configuring the CAN modules.............................. 72
Control panel........................................................ 67
D
Data logger........................................................... 67
Displays and buttons............................................ 68
DOWN key........................................................... 69
DULCO-Net........................................................ 177
E
Editing the names of the mA inputs................... 174
ENTER button...................................................... 68
Equipotential bonding pin..................................... 90
ESC button........................................................... 68
eventlog.txt........................................................... 81
F
F1 (Help).............................................................. 88
F2 (CAL)............................................................... 88
F4 (CAL1Pt)......................................................... 90
F4 (GLOBAL)....................................................... 80
F5 (ARCHIVE)...................................................... 81
F5 Function key.................................................... 71
Fault Messages.................................................... 81
I
Insert a module which has been temporarily
disconnected........................................................ 74
L
LAN/Ethernet ....................................................... 67
LEFT key.............................................................. 69
LSS nodes............................................................ 72
M
mA input editing................................................. 174
Maximum number of mA sensors per system /
pool...................................................................... 67
Maximum number of systems / pools................... 67
Measured variable colour..................................... 80
Metering OFF....................................................... 70
Metering ON......................................................... 70
Module logged off................................................. 74
Module re-registered............................................ 74
O
OPC server.......................................................... 67
Opening angle of the chloric gas metering unit
valve..................................................................... 78
P
Parametric assignment menu.............................. 79
Parametric assignment menu, first menu item..... 85
Password............................................................. 70
Permanently disconnect a module....................... 74
Plug & Play principle............................................ 67
Pool number....................................................... 177
R
Red chevron......................................................... 80
Replacing access codes...................................... 70
RIGHT key........................................................... 69
S
Safety information................................................ 62
SAVE.................................................................... 69
Save CAN configuration....................................... 75
SD card................................................................ 81
Shut off chloric gas metering................................ 77
Software update................................................... 72
191
Index
START/STOP key................................................ 70
Submenu access.................................................. 87
Summer time switchover...................................... 87
Switchover to summer time.................................. 87
T
Temporarily disconnect a module........................ 73
To change the name of the system...................... 75
192
U
Updating software................................................
UP key..................................................................
Users' qualifications.............................................
V
Virtual pools.........................................................
72
69
63
81
Operating instructions
DULCOMARIN® II, Screen Plotter
Operation
A0469
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 986790
BA DC 068 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5-11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986790, 1, en_GB
© 2011
194
Supplemental instructions
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 2: Operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II M-module
product type: DXMaM (measurement module for pH, redox,
temperature)
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II I-module
product type: DXMaI (current input module, standard signal
inputs mA)
195
Supplemental instructions
196
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
About this product............................................................. 198
1.1 Storage and transport............................................... 198
2
Setting up the screen plotter............................................. 199
3
Layout and function of the screen plotter.......................... 201
4
Using an SD card.............................................................. 203
5
Troubleshooting................................................................ 206
6
Technical data and accessories........................................ 207
197
About this product
1
About this product
The screen plotter for the swimming pool controller DULCO‐
MARIN® II is a software solution, which makes an expensive addi‐
tional device superfluous. It is designed as a 16-times 2 x 5
channel plotter. It displays the measured values for pH value,
redox value, free Cl and combined Cl and the temperature, as well
as the corresponding control variables (not for temperature), and
this for up to 16 pools. Without an SD-card it can save measure‐
ment results for 24 h, with an SD-card it can save measurement
results from 35 days up to 12 years, dependent on requirements.
Single TXT files from the SD card can be copied to a PC and, for
example, processed with EXCEL to create graphics.
1.1 Storage and transport
CAUTION!
– Store and transport the card reader and the SD
card in their original packaging
– Protect the entire DXCa update kit against mois‐
ture and the effects of chemicals.
The scope of supply of the DXCa update kit comprises:
n SD card
n Card reader
Ambient conditions for storage and transportation
n Temperature: 0 °C ... 45 °C
n Air humidity: 10 % ... 90 % relative air humidity, non-con‐
densing
198
Setting up the screen plotter
2
Setting up the screen plotter
Boot-up routines
Only after the DULCOMARIN® II has completed the
boot-up routine (duration approximately 4 minutes),
does the screen plotter start to operate.
PLOT
Plotting settings
Plotting :
HELP
inactive
ToneOff
SAVE
A0470
Fig. 1: The file card [PLOT] with inactive screen plotter
If the symbol for the screen plotter at the extreme left in the central
menu item is not available, it is necessary to proceed as follows:
1.
Press the [F4 CONFIG] key in the central menu item
2.
Press the [F2 OPTION] key in the configure menu
3.
In the file card [PLOT] press the [ENTER] key (if necessary,
enter the access code)
4.
Using the arrow keys [UP] or [DOWN] select ‘active’ and
press the [ENTER] key
5.
Press the function key [F5 SAVE]
6.
Press the [ESC ]key to jump back to the central menu item
199
Setting up the screen plotter
Adjusting the interface of the screen
plotter
PLOT
Plotting settings
Plotting :
Pen width=
Grid lines:
HELP
active
1 pixel
turned on
SAVE
ToneOff
A0471
Fig. 2: The file card [PLOT] with inactive screen plotter
Viewing the charts
1.
Press the [F4 CONFIG] key in the central menu item
2.
Press the [F2 OPTION] key in the configure menu
3.
In the file card [PLOT] select either ‘Line thickness ’ or ‘Grid
lines’ (arrow keys) (if necessary, enter the access code)
4.
Press the [ENTER] key
5.
Using the arrow keys [UP] and [DOWN] make the required
selection and then press the [ENTER] key
6.
Press the function key [F5 SAVE]
7.
Press the [ESC ]key to jump back to the central menu item
Pool
Children's pool
Set
Dosage:
Dosage:
OFF
ORP
Cl
free
Set
Cl
comb
Switch
Chlorine sensor
Temp
ORP
HELP
CAL
Value too low
PARAM CONFIG
LIST
A0472
Fig. 3: The central menu item with active screen plotter
In the central menu item, press the arrow keys [UP] or
[DOWN]
ð The charts for pH-value appear first.
200
Layout and function of the screen plotter
3
Layout and function of the screen plotter
A0473
Fig. 4: Plotter window layout
The screen plotter comprises:
n
n
n
n
n
n
Name of the measured variable
Pool number and pool name (with more than one pool)
Chart for the measured variable
Chart for the control variable of the measured variable
Information line for the selected measured value
Bar with function keys
Name of the measured variable
Select the measured variable with the arrow keys [UP] and
[DOWN].
Pool number and pool name
Select the pool with the arrow keys [LEFT] and [RIGHT].
Measured variable chart
The measured variable chart shows the y-axis and units on the
extreme left. The time axis (x-axis) is located between the meas‐
ured variable chart and the control variable chart. It always shows
24 hours. It only shows hour times where there are measured
values. Otherwise it shows ‘00:00’ .
The red lines indicate the set limit values (in the parameter menu:
Parameter Alarm). If the measured values exceed the limit values,
the measurement curve appears red in this position.
The blue line is a cursor, with which individual measured values
can be approached, so that their precise value can be read off (see
under ‘Info line for the selected measured value’ and ‘Bar with
function keys’ ). Initially it is positioned exactly on the y-axis.
Chart for the control variable of the
measured variable
The chart for the control variable of the measured variable shows
the y-axis on the extreme left with ‘%’ units. The time axis (x-axis)
is located between the chart for the measured variable and the
chart for the control variable. It always shows 24 hours.
201
Layout and function of the screen plotter
Information line for the selected
measured value
The information line for the selected measured value shows its pre‐
cise value. You select a measured value using the cursor (see
under ‘Bar with function keys’ ).
The sequence of displayed values is:
n
n
n
n
n
n
Bar with function keys
No. of the measured value
Measured value
Control variable value
Date of the measurement
Time of the measurement
(Display number)
Normal view
If the plotter takes the next measured value, the view
jumps back to the normal view (after no more than 5
minutes). Each change to another display resets the
view to the normal view.
Using the function key [ARCHIVE] you can check historical meas‐
ured values on the DULCOMARIN® II (values going back up to a
week). For this, you require an SD card. The function key bar con‐
tains the [ARCHIVE] function key as well as the function key pairs
[F2 ZOOM- ]/ [F3 ZOOM+] and[ F4 <CURSOR ]/ F5 CURSOR>:
The function key pair [F2 ZOOM-] / [F3 ZOOM+] is used to zoom
the y-axis for the measured variable.
The function key pair [F4 <CURSOR] / [F5 CURSOR>] is used to
move the blue cursor in the measured variable chart (it may pos‐
sibly initially be located on the y-axis).
More information
The time interval over which the DULCOMARIN® II plots the meas‐
ured values is 5 minutes. If the measurement curve has reached
the chart width, then for each new value on the right, an old value
disappears on the left.
The DULCOMARIN® II saves the measured values for the current
day. The DULCOMARIN® II saves the measured values of the last
day from 00:00 to 24:00 h as a file for each measured variable and
for each pool.
If an SD card is inserted, then the DULCOMARIN® II saves these
files on the SD card until it is full.
Using the function key [ARCHIVE] you can check historical meas‐
ured values on the DULCOMARIN® II, for periods going back up to
a week. In the archive you can use the function keys [<< ]and [>>]
to jump from day to day. The display shows the numbers of the
days in the top right corner.
202
Using an SD card
4
Using an SD card
NOTICE!
Before expiry of the number of maximum savable days
you must replace the full SD card for an empty SD
card.
Otherwise, the data for further days are lost, as the
DULCOMARIN® II cannot delete the data on the SD
card.
Requirement
A PC with at least WIN98 and a USB port.
If the measured values of the plotter are to be saved
for longer than 24 h, you must use an SD card.
The screen plotter shows the measured values for the
last 24 h. You can call up older measured values using
the [ARCHIVE] function key or load them on a PC
The required memory capacity depends on the number of days and pools.
Memory capacity
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
Number of pools
days
days
days
days
1
564
1128
2256
4512
2
282
564
1128
2256
3
188
376
752
1504
4
141
282
564
1128
5
112
224
448
896
6
94
188
376
752
7
80
160
320
640
8
70
140
280
560
9
62
124
248
496
10
56
112
224
448
11
51
102
204
408
12
47
94
188
376
13
43
86
172
344
14
40
80
160
320
15
37
74
148
296
16
35
70
140
280
SD card format: FAT 16 or FAT 32
File name format: JJMMDDBB.txt
where JJ = year, MM = month, DD = day, B or BB = pool number
203
Using an SD card
SD card insertion
A0474
Fig. 5: The interfaces with the interface cover of the DXCa shown open
1. Card slot
2. SD card
3. Interface cover
1.
2.
To insert the SD card, open the transparent interface cover
(3) at the bottom of the DXC housing of the
DULCOMARIN® II (shown Fig. 5 opened)
If you want to change one SD card for another,
then you must without fail carry out a reset prior
to the insertion.
If you forget to carry our a reset prior to the inser‐
tion, you must completely delete the SD card
contents and then carry out the reset.
Sequentially press: [F4 CONFIG], [F2 OPTION] and
[F3 RESET].
3.
If the DULCOMARIN® II has already saved data, then it
copies the files of the last day and the measured values of
the current day upon recording of the next measured value to
the SD card (waiting time up to 5 min) - the identifier ‘SD’
appears, highlighted in red
ð Do not pull out the SD card!
204
Using an SD card
Protection class IP 65
The transparent interface cover (3) in Fig. 5 must be
screwed in place again so that it is moisture-proof.
Otherwise the IP 65 rating is not achieved.
Evaluation of the SD card files
1.
To remove the SD card open the transparent interface cover
(3) at the bottom of the DXC housing of the
DULCOMARIN® II (shown Fig. 5 opened)
2.
Only pull out the SD card (2) from the card slot (1), if the
identifier ‘SD’ , at the top right on the LCD screen is high‐
lighted in green. Not when it is highlighted in red! The plotter
is then saving data. In this case wait briefly.
ð Once you have pulled out the SD card, the identifier ‘SD’
at the top right of the LCD screen disappears. Moreover
the error message ‘! Please insert SD card !!’ appears in
the continuous display and in the central menu item.
3.
Copy the files contained in the SD card to a PC via a card
reader and then delete the the SD card contents.
4.
Push the SD card (2) into the card slot (1) until it engages
ð Then at the top right on the LCD screen, the ‘SD’ identi‐
fier appears highlighted in green. Moreover, the error
message ‘! Please insert SD card !’ disappears.
To protect the data, the DULCOMARIN® II saves the
files with ‘write protection’ . When working, only use
copies and clear the file write-protection on the PC
under ‘Properties’ .
If you have changed the clock of the DULCOMARIN® II
from or to summer time, bear this in mind during data
evaluation.
205
Troubleshooting
5
Troubleshooting
Fault message
Cause
Remedy
! Please insert SD card!!
Plotter is activated, but no SD card is
inserted
Insert SD card
! SD card unformatted!!
SD card formatting is not FAT 16 or
FAT 32
Format SD card using FAT 16 or
FAT 32 This will delete all files on
the SD card!
! SD card write-protected!!
The slider on the side of the SD card
is set to ‘LOCK’
Push the slider on the side of the
SD card away from ‘LOCK’
! SD card full. Please replace!! SD card is full
After changing the SD card,
the values directly after 24:00
hours are missing on the
measurement curves
206
Copy all files from the SD card to
the PC and delete the card con‐
tents
Before changing the SD card, no reset Carry out a reset. Press the fol‐
was carried out
lowing sequentially:[ F4 CONFIG],
[F2 OPTION] and [F3 RESET]
Technical data and accessories
6
Technical data and accessories
Technical data
Potter type: 16-times 2x5-channel plotter (16 pools, measured vari‐
able and control variable, 5 measured variables)
Ambient conditions for storage and transportation: Update kit
DXCa
n Temperature: 0 °C ... 45 °C
n Air humidity: 10 % ... 90 % relative air humidity, non-con‐
densing
Ambient conditions for operation: Card reader
n Temperature: 0 °C ... 45 °C
n Air humidity: 20 % ... 85 % relative air humidity, non-con‐
densing
Ambient conditions for operation: SD card
n Temperature: -25 °C ... 85 °C
Accessories
Accessories
Part number
Update-Kit DXCa (in scope of supply), comprising SD card and card reader
1025885
SD memory card 64 MB or greater
732483
207
Technical data and accessories
208
Assembly and operating instructions
DULCOMARIN® II, A-Module
(Control Module, Pump and Standard Signal Out‐
puts mA) DXMaA
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXMa _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 986906
BA DC 069 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986906, 1, en_GB
© 2011
210
Supplemental instructions
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and installation
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 2: Operation
211
Supplemental instructions
212
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Identity code...................................................................... 214
2
About this device............................................................... 216
2.1 Safety chapter........................................................... 216
2.2 Storage and transport............................................... 216
3
Assembly and installation................................................. 217
4
Technical data................................................................... 220
213
Identity code
1
Identity code
The identity code describes the external modules for
the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Only the M module of mounting type ‘W’ ‘Wall
mounting’ can be ordered with operating elements and
with different languages.
DXMa
External modules for the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Module:
M
M module, measuring module: pH, redox, temperature
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog outputs
R
R module, control module: Chlorine gas metering device with feedback 1) 2)
N
N module, power supply module without relay 1) 2)
P
P module, power supply module without relay, only mounting type ‘0)’
I
I module, current input module, 3 mA inputs, 2 digital inputs
2)
Mounting type:
0
Without housing, only P-module (IP 00)
W
Wall mounted (IP 65)
H
Mounting rail (IP 20)
E
Upgrade module (insert module for DXCa, IP 20)
Version:
0
With controls
2
Without controls
3
Without controls (only mounting type ‘E’ )
Application:
0
Standard
S
Swimming pool (only m module)
Language:
00
No controls 2)
DE
German
EN
English
ES
Spanish
FR
French
IT
Italian
Certification:
214
00
No certification, only P-module
without housing
01
CE mark
Identity code
only mounting type W wall mounting / 2) only in version ‘2’
without controls
1)
215
About this device
2
About this device
The control module DXMaA allows the DULCOMARIN® II to control
3 metering pumps by pulse frequency, e.g. to increase or lower the
pH value or to meter disinfectant.
The DXMaA control module has the following outputs:
n Four standard signal outputs 0/4...20 mA, freely programmable
and scalable for measured values, e.g. of pH value, redox
voltage, the concentration of free chlorine or total chlorine or
combined chlorine or temperature.
n Three frequency outputs for controlling metering pumps e.g. to
increase or lower the pH value or to meter disinfectant
and the following inputs:
n Three contact inputs for evaluating the fault indicating relay of
the metering pumps and monitoring the container fill level
2.1 Safety chapter
The DXMaA control module must only be used as part of the
DULCOMARIN® II.
The installation must only be carried out by technically trained per‐
sonnel.
2.2 Storage and transport
CAUTION!
Protect the module against moisture and the effects of
chemicals, even while still packaged.
Store and transport the module it its original packaging.
Ambient conditions for storage and transportation:
n Temperature: -10 °C ... 70 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
216
Assembly and installation
3
Assembly and installation
NOTICE!
The installation must only be carried out by technically
trained personnel.
When assembling and installing this device, observe
the instructions in the operating instructions "Multichannel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Dis‐
infection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and instal‐
lation".
Incorrect measured values
The standard signals can be falsified, possibly with
consequences for the process.
You may only directly connect devices with autono‐
mous galvanic isolation of the individual standard
signal inputs to the standard signal outputs (e.g. the
standard signal inputs of a plotter,...)!
If you want to connect a multi-channel standard signal
input module of a PLC to several standard signal out‐
puts of the DXMaA module, then you must route each
standard signal wire via a 3-way standard signal iso‐
lator. A 3-way standard signal isolator galvanically iso‐
lates the input, the output and the supply voltage from
each other.
Where there are several standard signal wires, a multichannel isolating amplifier can be used. ProMinent rec‐
ommends 4-channel isolating amplifiers of type LCTV-4I.4I as supplied by Rinck www.rinck-electronic.de
or of type 6185D supplied by PR Electronics
www.prelectronics.de for the connection of up to 4
standard signal wires.
Make the CAN connection according to the "Multi-channel meas‐
uring and control system operating instructions DULCOMARIN® II
Swimming Pool Controller and Disinfection Controller DXCa Part 1,
Assembly and Installation".
217
Assembly and installation
A0476
Fig. 1: Terminal Wiring Diagram
I. Small voltage relay outputs
II. Contact inputs DXMa A
III. Standard signal outputs 0/4 - 20 mA
Terminal allocation
Description
Terminal identifier
Terminal no.
Pole
Function
Frequency output 1
R1
1
+
pH lowering pump (control)
2
-
pH raising pump
3
+
Chlorine pump (control)
Frequency output 2
R2
ORP pump
Frequency output 3
R3
4
-
pH lowering pump
5
+
Flocculent pump
ORP pump
6
-
Chlorine pump
7
+
Pump error
8
-
9
+
10
-
11
+
12
-
I out 1
13
+
pH value
Current output 0/4-20 mA 1
14
-
Control variable pH-lower
Contact input 1
Contact input 2
Contact input 3
K1
K2
K3
Pump error
Pump error
Control variable pH-raise
Control variable chlorination
Control variable flocculent
218
Assembly and installation
Description
Terminal identifier
Terminal no.
Pole
Function
Control variable ORP
(Plotter connection)
Control circulation
Current output
0/4-20 mA 2
I out 2
15
+
ORP value
16
-
Control variable pH-lower
Control variable pH-raise
Control variable chlorination
Control variable flocculent
Control variable ORP
(Plotter connection)
Current output
0/4-20 mA 3
I out 3
17
+
Chlorine value
18
-
Control variable pH-lower
Control variable pH-raise
Control variable chlorination
Control variable flocculent
Control variable ORP
(Plotter connection)
Current output
0/4-20 mA 4
I out 3
19
+
chlorine bound
20
-
Control variable pH-lower
Control variable pH-raise
Control variable chlorination
Control variable flocculent
Control variable ORP
(Plotter connection)
219
Technical data
4
Technical data
Electrical data
Frequency outputs (Opto-MOS-relay) for pump control (R1, R2,
R3):
n Type of contact: N/O with interference-suppressed series
inductances
n Load capacity: 400 V peak, 250 mA switching current, max. 0.8
W
n Maximum frequency: 8.33 Hz (500 strokes/min)
n Closing time/opening time: 5 ms
Contact inputs (K1, K2, K3) (term. 9 – 14):
n
n
n
n
n
Galvanically isolated from each other
Insulation voltage: 500 V
Max. contact frequency: 2 kHz
Connectable contacts: mechanical relay
Max. connectable cable length: 20 m
Standard signal outputs mA (I out 1 - I out 4):
n
n
n
n
n
Material
220
Insulation voltage: 500 V
Output range: 0/4-20 mA (programmable)
23 mA for error messaging
Maximum apparent ohmic resistance: 400 Ω
Accuracy: 0.5 % of output range
Housing: PPE-GF 10
Installation instructions
DULCOMARIN® II, G-Module
(Limit Value and Alarm Generator Module
DXMaG)
A0787
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXMa _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 986049
BA DC 70 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986049, 1, en_GB
© 2011
222
Supplemental instructions
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and installation
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 2: Operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, M-Module
(measuring module for pH, redox [ORP], temperature) DXMaM
operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II, I-Module (cur‐
rent input module, standard signal inputs mA) DXMal
223
Supplemental instructions
224
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Identity code...................................................................... 226
2
About this device............................................................... 227
2.1 Safety chapter........................................................... 227
2.2 Storage and transport............................................... 227
3
Assembly and installation................................................. 228
4
Technical data................................................................... 230
225
Identity code
1
Identity code
The identity code describes the external modules for
the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
DXMa
External modules for the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Module:
G
G-module, limit value and alarm module 1) 2)
Mounting type:
W
Wall mounted (IP 65)
Version:
2
Without controls
Application:
0
Standard
Language:
00
No controls 2)
Certification:
01
CE mark
only mounting type W wall mounting / 2) only in version ‘2’
without controls
1)
226
About this device
2
About this device
The limit value and alarm generator module DXMaG with two limit
or alarm relays signals alarm overshoots, general errors and
sample water errors.
2.1 Safety chapter
The DXMaG limit value and alarm generator module must only be
used as part of the DULCOMARIN® II.
The installation must only be carried out by technically trained per‐
sonnel.
2.2 Storage and transport
CAUTION!
Protect the module against moisture and the effects of
chemicals, even while still packaged.
Store and transport the module it its original packaging.
Ambient conditions for storage and transportation:
n Temperature: -10 °C ... 70 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
227
Assembly and installation
3
Assembly and installation
G module, DXMaG description
The G module is a limit value or alarm generator module. It has
two potential-free changer relays for signalling alarm states.
Each of the two relays has different setting options, which can
influence the relay effects.
Both relays offer the same setting options.
Hence through the use of different delay periods, pre-warning or
shut-down signals can be generated.
NOTICE!
The installation must only be carried out by technically
trained personnel.
When assembling and installing this device, observe
the instructions in the operating instructions "Multichannel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Dis‐
infection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and instal‐
lation".
Create the CAN connection in accordance with the
Operating instructions DULCOMARIN ® II Swimming
Pool Controller and Disinfection Controller DXCa , Part
1: Assembly and installation".
228
Assembly and installation
A0788
Fig. 1: Wiring diagram, G module / power relay outputs
I. Limit value / alarm generator 1
II. Limit value / alarm generator 2
Terminal allocation
Description
Power relay output 1
Power relay output 2
Terminals
Terminals
Identifier
number
P1
P2
Pole
Function
1
C
2
to select
NO
Limit value / alarm gener‐
ator 1
3
NC
1
C
2
to select
NO
3
NC
Limit value / alarm gener‐
ator 2
The XR terminals have no function.
229
Technical data
4
Technical data
Electrical data
Power relay output (P1, P2):
n Type of contact: Changeover contact with interference-sup‐
pressed varistors
n Load capacity: 250 V AC, 3 A max., 700 VA
n Contact operational lifetime: > 20 x 105 switching operations
Material
230
Housing: PPE-GF 10
Operating instructions
DULCOMARIN® II, I-Module
(Current Input Module, Standard Signal Inputs
mA) DXMaI
A0483
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXMA _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 986463
BA DC 071 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986463, 1, en_GB
© 2011
232
Supplemental instructions
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and installation
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 2: Operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II Screen writer
operation
233
Supplemental instructions
234
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Identity code...................................................................... 236
2
About this device............................................................... 238
2.1 Safety chapter........................................................... 238
2.2 Storage and transport............................................... 238
3
Assembly and installation................................................. 239
4
Technical data................................................................... 241
235
Identity code
1
Identity code
The identity code describes the external modules for
the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Only the M module of mounting type ‘W’ ‘Wall
mounting’ can be ordered with operating elements and
with different languages.
DXMa
External modules for the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Module:
M
M module, measuring module: pH, redox, temperature
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog outputs
R
R module, control module: Chlorine gas metering device with feedback 1) 2)
N
N module, power supply module without relay 1) 2)
P
P module, power supply module without relay, only mounting type ‘0)’
I
I module, current input module, 3 mA inputs, 2 digital inputs
2)
Mounting type:
0
Without housing, only P-module (IP 00)
W
Wall mounted (IP 65)
H
Mounting rail (IP 20)
E
Upgrade module (insert module for DXCa, IP 20)
Version:
0
With controls
2
Without controls
3
Without controls (only mounting type ‘E’ )
Application:
0
Standard
S
Swimming pool (only m module)
Language:
00
No controls 2)
DE
German
EN
English
ES
Spanish
FR
French
IT
Italian
Certification:
236
00
No certification, only P-module
without housing
01
CE mark
Identity code
only mounting type W wall mounting / 2) only in version ‘2’
without controls
1)
237
About this device
2
About this device
The current input module DXMaI allows the DULCOMARIN® II to
connect 2 switches / relays and 3 sensors via 0/4...20 mA inputs.
The DXMaI control module has the following inputs:
n Contact inputs for sample water monitoring and pause
n 3 standard signal inputs 0/4...20 mA
The mA values of the sensors for flow, turbidity, UV-intensity, con‐
ductive conductivity, dissolved oxygen and ammonia are received
already processed (compensated and calibrated).
The mA values for ClO2, H2O2, PES, fluoride and chlorite can be
temperature compensated. To do this, a PT1000 sensor with mA
transformer must be connected to an mA input.
2.1 Safety chapter
The DXMaI current input module must only be used as part of the
DULCOMARIN® II.
The installation must only be carried out by technically trained per‐
sonnel.
2.2 Storage and transport
CAUTION!
Protect the module against moisture and the effects of
chemicals, even while still packaged.
Store and transport the module it its original packaging.
Ambient conditions for storage and transportation:
n Temperature: -10 °C ... 70 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
238
Assembly and installation
3
Assembly and installation
NOTICE!
The installation must only be carried out by technically
trained personnel.
When assembling and installing this device, observe
the instructions in the operating instructions "Multichannel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Dis‐
infection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and instal‐
lation".
Make the CAN connection according to the "Multi-channel meas‐
uring and control system operating instructions DULCOMARIN® II
Swimming Pool Controller and Disinfection Controller DXCa Part 1,
Assembly and Installation".
Terminal allocation
Description
Terminal identifier
Terminal no.
Pol
Function
Contact input 1
K1
1
-
Fault sample water
2
+
3
-
4
+
5
in
6
GND
(-)
7
V+
Fluoride
8
in
O2, ClO2, ClO2 -,
9
GND
(-)
H2O2, NH4OH)
10
V+
Temperature
11
in
(UV, turbidity,
12
GND
(-)
conductivity, ClO2 -)
Contact input 2
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog input 3
K2
I in 1
I in 2
I in 3
Pause control (e.g. back‐
washing)
Flow (turbidity)
239
Assembly and installation
Fig. 1: Terminal Wiring Diagram
I.
Assignment variants
II.
ProMinent® Transducer/Sensor
SPS PLC Programmable logic controller
For the measured variables, which are input through terminal "I in 2", the following functionalities are avail‐
able in the software:
F-
O2
ClO2
ClO2-
H2O2
Regulate ✱
-
-
X
X
X
Calibrate
X
-
X
-
X
✱ For this a pump must be previously configured (see "Operating
instructions Multi-channel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II Disinfection Controller DXCa, Part 2: Opera‐
tion").
240
Technical data
4
Technical data
Electrical data
Digital inputs (K1 - K2):
n 2 inputs: for contacts, switching transistors and for PLC analog
outputs as per DIN EN 61131-2
n Insulation voltage: 500 V
n Input resistance: 3.5 kΩ
n Open circuit voltage: 10 V ... 12 V
n Switching point:
– Passive: 1750 Ω, typical
– Active: 3.15 mA, typical
n Input current:
– 4 mA (0 V)
– 5.8 mA (30 V)
n Input capacity: 100 nF
n Switching hysteresis: 20 μA
n Max.switching frequency: 1 kHz
Standard signal outputs mA (I in 1 - I in 3):
3 inputs: 0/4 ... 20 mA, isolated
Insulation voltage: 500 V
Input resistance: 50 Ω
Load capacity: 30 mA
2 inputs with 2-wire connector (sliding supply) (I in 2, I in 3):
Supply voltage 22.0 V- 25.0 V
n Measuring accuracy: ± 0.5 % of the measuring range (at 25 °C)
n Resolution: 1/215
n
n
n
n
n
Ambient conditions
Storage temperature: -10...70 °C
Protective system:
n Degree of protection: as Internet module IP 20
n as external module, wall mounted IP 65, according to IEC
60529, DIN EN 60529, VDE 0470
n as external module, control panel mounted IP 54, according to
IEC 60529, DIN EN 60529, VDE 0470
Material
Housing: PPE-GF 10
241
Technical data
242
Assembly and operating instructions
DULCOMARIN® II, M-Module
DXMaM (Measurement Module for pH, Redox,
Temperature)
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXMA _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 985989
BA DC 072 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
985989, 1, en_GB
© 2011
244
Supplemental instructions
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 2: Operation
n Supplementary instructions DULCOMARIN® II Screen plotter
operation
245
Supplemental instructions
246
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Identity code...................................................................... 248
2
Safety and responsibility................................................... 250
3
Handling the device.......................................................... 251
4
Terminal Wiring Diagram.................................................. 252
5
Control elements............................................................... 255
5.1 Layout of the operating menu................................... 256
6
Adjustment........................................................................
6.1 Basic settings............................................................
6.2 Calibration.................................................................
6.2.1 pH calibration.........................................................
6.2.2 Checking the redox sensor....................................
6.2.3 Calibrating a temperature sensor..........................
6.2.4 Calibrating a chlorine sensor for free chlorine.......
6.2.5 Calibrating a chlorine sensor for total chlorine.......
6.2.6 Chlorine sensor temperature.................................
259
259
260
260
264
265
266
267
268
247
Identity code
1
Identity code
The identity code describes the external modules for
the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Only the M module of mounting type ‘W’ ‘Wall
mounting’ can be ordered with operating elements and
with different languages.
DXMa
External modules for the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Module:
M
M module, measuring module: pH, redox, temperature
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog outputs
R
R module, control module: Chlorine gas metering device with feedback 1) 2)
N
N module, power supply module without relay 1) 2)
P
P module, power supply module without relay, only mounting type ‘0)’
I
I module, current input module, 3 mA inputs, 2 digital inputs
2)
Mounting type:
0
Without housing, only P-module (IP 00)
W
Wall mounted (IP 65)
H
Mounting rail (IP 20)
E
Upgrade module (insert module for DXCa, IP 20)
Version:
0
With controls
2
Without controls
3
Without controls (only mounting type ‘E’ )
Application:
0
Standard
S
Swimming pool (only m module)
Language:
00
No controls 2)
DE
German
EN
English
ES
Spanish
FR
French
IT
Italian
Certification:
248
00
No certification, only P-module
without housing
01
CE mark
Identity code
only mounting type W wall mounting / 2) only in version ‘2’
without controls
1)
249
Safety and responsibility
2
Safety and responsibility
About this device
The measurement module DXMaM typically allows the DULCO‐
MARIN® II to:
n
n
n
n
measure and control the pH value
measure and display the redox potential (optional controller)
measure and display the temperature of the sample water
monitor the sample water flow
The DXMaM measurement module has the following inputs:
n One Pt1000 temperature input (Pt100, automatic sensor detec‐
tion)
n Two sensor inputs for pH or redox measurement with potential
equalisation
n Three contact inputs for pause, parameter set switching,
sample water monitoring
Safety
NOTICE!
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions are only valid in conjunc‐
tion with the "Operating instructions DULCOMARIN® II,
Part 1: Assembly and installation".
All the safety instructions and explanations contained
therein must be observed without exception.
WARNING!
Danger of malfunctions
Only trained personnel may install the DXMaR M
module. Only then can it be ensured that all compo‐
nents of the control circuit are matched to each other
and operating correctly
NOTICE!
Registering and unregistering components to the CAN
bus
The chlorine sensor must be registered to the CAN
bus. You can find further information in the "Operating
instructions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Con‐
troller and Disinfection Controller DXCa Part 2: Opera‐
tion".
250
Handling the device
3
Handling the device
Storage and transport
CAUTION!
Protect the module against moisture and the effects of
chemicals, even while still packaged!
Store and transport the module it its original packaging.
Ambient conditions for storage and transport:
n Temperature: -10 °C ... 70 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
Assembly and installation
WARNING!
Danger of malfunctions
Only trained personnel may install the M module
DXMaM. Only then can it be ensured that all compo‐
nents of the control circuit are matched to each other
and operating correctly
NOTICE!
Terminal Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram can be found at the end of these
operating instructions, see .
Create the CAN connection in accordance with the operating
instructions "DULCOMARIN® II, Part 1: Assembly and installation".
251
Terminal Wiring Diagram
4
Terminal Wiring Diagram
Sensor "combination probe"
Temp input
+
Input 1
Potential equalisation
Digital inputs
Input 2
-
+
W
-
+
-
+
-
X
Pot.-equalisation pin ORP (pH)*
Temperature
External
Pot.-equalisation pin pH (ORP)*
Internal
3 4
Shielding open
Shielding holder
7 8
A0451
Fig. 1: Sensor "combination probe"
✱ The "Potential equalisation" function must be activated in the software
252
Terminal Wiring Diagram
Sensor: "Separate probe"
Temp input
Input 1
Input 2
Potential equalisation
Digital inputs
Signal
Shielding
3 4
Ref. electrode
Pot. equalisation pin
Pot. equalisation pin
Shielding
Ref. electrode
Temperature
External
Signal
Internal
Shielding open
Shielding holder
7 8
Fig. 2: Sensor: "Separate probe"
✱ The "Potential equalisation" function must be activated in the software
Terminal allocation
Description
Terminal identifier
Terminal no. Pol.
Function
Temp. input
RTD
1
+
2
-
Pt1000(100 (temp.
sensor)
3
Ref.
4
meas sig.
Pt1000/100
pH/redox input 1
pH (ORP)
Potential equalisation 1
POT 1
5
Potential equalisation 2
POT 2
6
pH/redox input 2
pH (ORP)
7
Ref.
8
meas sig.
9
+
10
-
Contact input 1
K1
ORP sensor
pH sensor
Sample water (error)
253
Terminal Wiring Diagram
Description
Terminal identifier
Terminal no. Pol.
Function
Contact input 2
K2
11
+
12
-
Pause control (back‐
washing)
13
+
14
-
Contact input 3
Electrical data
K3
ECO!MODE
Pt1000/Pt100 input (RTD) (Term. 1, 2):
n Input range: -20 ... 150 °C
n Accuracy: ± 0.5 °C
n Resolution: 0.1 °C
Sensor input (ORP) (term. 3, 4) for redox:
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
Input resistance: > 1012 Ohm
All reference electrodes with diaphragms can be connected.
Input range: Redox: -1200 mV ... +1200 mV
Accuracy: 0.5 % of input range
Resolution: 1 mV (0.01 pH)
Reference electrode connection via shielding connection
Connecting option for a equipotential bonding probe
Sensor input (pH) (term. 7, 8) for pH:
n
n
n
n
Input resistance: > 1012 Ohm
Input range: pH: -1 ... 15 (0 ... 100 °C)
Resolution: 0.01 pH
Further data such as ‘Sensor input (ORP)’ .
Contact inputs (K1, K2, K3) (term. 9 – 14):
n
n
n
n
n
Ambient conditions
Galvanically isolated from each other
Insulation voltage: 500 V
Max. contact frequency: 2 kHz
Connectable contacts: mechanical relay
Max. connectable cable length: 20 m
Storage temperature: -10...70 °C
Protection rating: IP 20 (within the DXM housing: IP 65)
Climate: Permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
Material
254
Housing: PPE-GF 10
Control elements
5
Control elements
Fig. 3: Control elements
1.
2.
3.
4.
Module type label
LCD display
CAL key
ENTER key
Functions of the keys
5.
6.
7.
8.
UP key
DOWN key
ESC key
Change key
You can use the keys to change the DULCOMARIN® II settings.
The keys have the following functions:
Key
In the continuous display or in the info
displays
In the menu items
Change key
Change between continuous displays
Change between the adjustable variables of
the current menu item
ESC key
Jump back from the info displays to the
continuous displays
Jump back to the info display without
saving of the adjustable variables
Enter key
Change to a menu item (from an info
display)
Save the adjustable variables of the current
menu item and change to the info display
CAL key
Change to an info display of the calibra‐
tion menu (from the continuous display)
Execution of the calibration step in the cali‐
bration menu (only for pH)
Down key
------
Changing of an adjustable variable
Up key
255
Control elements
5.1 Layout of the operating menu
The operating menu comprises:
n the continuous displays (continuous display level)
n the info displays (info level) for the display of the set calibration
parameters or basic settings
n the calibration menu
n the menu items (adjustment level) for changing the calibration
parameters or basic settings
Permanent display 1
Info display
Menu point
Permanent display 2
Info display
Menu point *
Permanent display X
Info display
Menu point
=
A0454
Fig. 4: Layout of the operating menu
I.
II.
III.
Calibration menu
Continuous displays
Info level
Navigation through the operating
menu
IV.
V.
Adjustment level
Querying of the access code (only if activated
by the user)
Using the ESC key it is essentially possible to abort the current
selection in any window of the operating menu. Irrespective of
where you are located in the operating menu, a jump back to the
corresponding continuous display or info display occurs.
If no key is pressed for 5 minutes, the display automatically jumps
back to the continuous display (without saving the adjustable varia‐
bles).
If an access code has been activated by the user, the menu items
of the adjustment level are first locked. For ‘Unlocking’ , the access
code must be entered in the corresponding query and confirmed
with the Enter key. As soon as the DXMaM is again in a continuous
display, this ‘Unlocking’ is removed. The access code is set to
‘0000’ ex-works and is thus inactive.
256
Control elements
Continuous displays
Cl:
pH
Control value:
free Cl
Control: not activated
comb. Cl (total Cl)
Temp Cl sensor
comb. Cl
Control value:
Chlore total:
0.45 ppm
Cl sensor
A0455
Fig. 5: Continuous displays
I.
Continuous Display 1
During operation you can monitor the measured values of the cor‐
responding pools via the continuous displays. Which continuous
displays of the DXMaM are shown depends on which sensors are
connected to the DULCOMARIN® II and configured. Continuous
display 1 can display up to four measured variables. Alongside
this, each measured variable has a further continuous display of its
own.
The continuous displays can display the following:
n Measured variables [pH], [Redox], [Free chlorine], [Cl comb]
([Cl tot] in the footer), temperature (separate Pt1000 and Cl
sensor)
n Activity of the controller for a measured variable and corre‐
spondingly the control variable
Info displays
By pressing the Enter key or the CAL key in a continuous display,
you enter the corresponding info display (info level).
Calibration menu
By pressing the CAL key in a continuous display, you enter the cor‐
responding calibration menu
Menu items
By pressing the Enter key in the info displays, you enter the corre‐
sponding menu items (adjustment level)
Navigation in the menu item
–
–
Your entries become effective and are perma‐
nently saved at the moment you press the Enter
key
If you do not want to save the set variables, then
exit the menu item by pressing the ESC key: You
move back to the corresponding info display
257
Control elements
Capture
Unit:
Corr.± =
measuring value
A0457
Fig. 6: Navigation in the menu item
I.
Adjustable numerical value/expression flashes
In a menu item, you can activate each adjustable variable with the
ESC key. If the adjustable variable flashes, then it can be adjusted.
Using the arrow keys, you can change the numerical values or
expressions.
Where:
n 1x short press means that a numerical value will be decreased/
increased by 1 step or an expression changed
n longer pressing causes changing of the numerical values to
take place more quickly.
n You can save the set variables of the menu item by pressing
the Enter key. Simultaneously you change back to the info dis‐
play.
258
Adjustment
6
Adjustment
pH:
ORP:
Temp:
Cl:
7.12
654 mV
25 ˚C
1.12 mg/l
Version:
2001
Number of permanent displays is dependent on the allocated sensors
7.12
Control value:
Language:English
Password: 4444
Base settings
pH
24%
Calibrate with CAL!
Zero point=12 mV
slope = 58.32 mV/pH
Buffer temp=25.2 ˚C
Buffer recogn.
T. = 20.3 ˚C
Buffer recogn.
T. = 20.3 ˚C
Buffer temp= 25.2 ˚C
Calibrate with CAL!
Calibration
End=
T. = 20.3 ˚C
or cal2=CAL
T. = 20.3 ˚C
End calib. by
Calibration
T. = 20.3 ˚C
T. = 20.3 ˚C
Zero point
Slope
Accept
measuring value
654
mV
ORP
Control: not activated
25.6
˚C
Temp:
Pt1000
1.12
mg/l
Cl
Control value:
24%
0.13
total Cl:
mg/l
comb. Cl
0.45 ppm
25.3
°C
Temp:
Cl sensor
Adjust with CAL!
Offset = 2 mV
accept
Adj.value 654 mV
measuring value
= 654 mV
measuring =value
652 mV
Calibrate with CAL!
Offset = 1.1 °C
accept
Adj.value
measuring value
= 20.6 ˚C
measuring value
= 20.6 ˚C
Calibrate with CAL!
Zero point = 5 pA
slope = 105.22
%
measuring=value
0.52 mg/l
Calibrate with CAL!
Zero point = 5 pA
slope = 105.22 %
measuring =
value
0.52 mg/l
21.7 ˚C
accept
DPD-value: 0.56 mg/l
measuring =value
0.52 mg/l
accept
DPD-value
: 0.56 mg/l
0.52 mg/l
measuring=value
= I.
A0458
Fig. 7: Menu overview
I.
Querying of the access code (only if activated by the user)
6.1 Basic settings
NOTICE!
Factory-set access code
Replace the factory-set access code with your own
access code. Otherwise protection of the following
menus will be extremely weak.
When jumping back in a continuous display the
DULCOMARIN® II automatically removes the author‐
ised access.
259
Adjustment
Access code (password)
You can limit access to the device by setting an
access code.
Language and access code settings can be made in the ‘Basic
settings’ menu:
1.
In continuous display 1 press the Enter key 2x
2.
Under ‘Language’ set the desired language using the arrow
keys
3.
Change to the selection ‘Password’ by pressing the Change
key
4.
Under ‘Password’ set the desired access code using the
arrow keys
5.
Press the ENTER key to accept the values or press the ESC
key if you do not want to save the values
ð The display changes to the info display.
6.
Jump back to the continuous display by pressing the ESC
key
ð The menus are then password protected again
6.2 Calibration
6.2.1 pH calibration
Calibration of pH measurement
Automatic buffer detection
The condition of a pH sensor is decisive for the quality
of the measurement. Therefore each pH sensor must
periodically be recalibrated using buffer solutions. The
DXMaM has an automatic buffer detection system for
the buffer solution being used.
The following buffer table is stored in the program memory:
Buffer temperature in °C
pH
0
4.05
7.13
10.26
5
4.04
7.07
10.17
10
4.02
7.05
10.11
15
4.01
7.02
10.05
20
4.00
7.00
10.00
25
4.00
6.98
9.94
30
4.00
6.98
9.90
40
4.00
6.97
9.82
50
4.00
6.96
9.75
60
4.00
6.97
9.68
It is recommended that only ProMinent® buffer solutions are used for calibration.
260
Adjustment
Buffer temperature in °C
pH
70
4.01
6.98
9.62
80
4.02
6.99
9.55
It is recommended that only ProMinent® buffer solutions are used for calibration.
Sequence of the pH calibration
–
–
–
–
Using the ESC key you can always abort a calibra‐
tion from any menu item in the calibration menu.
The screen jumps back to the continuous display
The control variable is frozen for the duration of the
calibration at the last value (HOLD)
Unallowable values make the currently running cal‐
ibration invalid. The previous calibration values are
retained
Dispose of the used buffer solution
Calibration menu overview
7.12
pH
Control value: 24 %
Sensor calibration
Zero point= 12 mV
slope = 58.32 mV/pH
Buffer temp= 25.2 °C
Buffer temp= 20.3 °C
Buffer recogn.
Calibration
Buffer recogn.
Calibration
Zero point
Slope
Accept
measuring value
End calib. by
I.
II.
A0459
Fig. 8: 2 point calibration
I. The display change only takes place once the time bar is completely solid
II. Querying of the access code (only if activated by the user)
261
Adjustment
Sensor calibration
Zero point=12 mV
slope = 58.32 mV/pH
Buffer temp= 25.2 °C
pH
Control value:
24%
Buffer temp= 20.3 °C
Buffer recogn.
Calibration
End=
or cal2=CAL
Zero point
Slope
Accept
measuring value
A0460
Fig. 9: 1 point calibration
I. The display change only takes place once the time bar is completely solid
II. Querying of the access code (only if activated by the user)
Actuating variable:
Sensor calibration
Zero point=12 mV
slope = 58.32 mV/pH
Buffer temp = 25.2 °C
Buffer temp = 25.2 °C
A0461
Fig. 10: To call the calibration menu, proceed as follows:
Start the calibration
1.
In the ‘pH’ continuous display press the CAL key 2x, while
the pH sensor is still in the sample water
2.
Under ‘Buffer temp.’ set the buffer temperature using the
arrow keys
ð This setting is only valid during the calibration procedure.
3.
Take the pH sensor out of the sample water, rinse and
immerse in the first buffer solution (here pH 4)
Calibration
Buffer recogn.
End
or
A0462
Fig. 11: Automatic buffer detection
4.
Press the CAL key to start the automatic buffer detection
ð The progress of the buffer detection is shown by a time
bar.
The manually set buffer temperature is displayed
under ‘T’ .
5.
262
After buffer detection, calculation of the calibration parame‐
ters starts automatically (Calibration). This is likewise shown
by a time bar
Adjustment
You can correct the buffer value during the calibration using the
arrow keys. If the sensor signal is unstable, the time bar remains
stationary until it becomes stable. After the calibration, the con‐
cluding menu item of the 1-point calibration appears. Once again
you can correct the buffer value here using the arrow keys.
The following procedure then depends on whether you wish to
carry out a 1-point calibration or a 2-point calibration (recom‐
mended!).
1.
1 point calibration
Press the ENTER key to end the 1-point calibration
ð The zero point is calibrated if the buffer values lies
between 5.5 and 8.0 pH.
Zero point
Slope
Accept
measuring value
A0464
Fig. 12: Zero Point and Gradient
2.
The calibration values (zero point and gradient) are now dis‐
played
The check of the actual pH value is displayed under
‘Measured value’ .
3.
Press the ENTER key to accept the values or press the ESC
key if you do not want to save the values
ð The display changes to the info display, the calibration is
completed.
4.
Jump back to the continuous display by pressing the ESC
key
ð The menus are then password protected again
1.
2 point calibration
Buffer recogn.
For a 2-point calibration, take the pH sensor out of the first
buffer solution, rinse in clean water and immerse it in the
second buffer solution
Calibration
End calib. by
A0463
Fig. 13: Automatic buffer detection
2.
Press the CAL key to start the automatic buffer detection
3.
After the calibration, the concluding menu item of the 2-point
calibration appears.
ð Once again you can correct the buffer value using the
arrow keys.
4.
Press the ENTER key to end the 2-point calibration
263
Adjustment
Zero point
Slope
Accept
measuring value
A0464
Fig. 14: Zero Point and Gradient
5.
The calibration values (zero point and gradient) are now dis‐
played
The check of the actual pH value is displayed under
‘Measured value’ .
6.
Press the ENTER key to accept the values or press the ESC
key if you do not want to save the values
ð The display changes to the info display, the calibration is
completed.
7.
Jump back to the continuous display by pressing the ESC
key
ð The menus are then password protected again
Error messages
Unallowable values make the currently running calibra‐
tion invalid. The previous calibration values are
retained.
Fault message
Cause
Effect
Zero point < -60 mV !!!
N < -60 mV
Old zero point and gradient remain
Calibr. invalid
Zero point > 60 mV !!!
Replace sensor
N > +60 mV
Calibr. invalid
Slope < 40 mV/pH !
Replace sensor
S < 47 mV/pH
Calibr. invalid
Slope > 65 mV/pH !
Old zero point and gradient remain
Replace sensor
S > 63 mV/pH
Calibr. invalid
Buffer gap too small!
Old zero point and gradient remain
Old zero point and gradient remain
Replace sensor
Δ buffer < 2 pH
Calibrate buffer 2 again
Calibr. invalid
6.2.2 Checking the redox sensor
NOTICE!
No controller
The control variable is frozen for the duration of the
checking of the redox sensor at the last value (HOLD)
264
Adjustment
Control: not activated
Check sensor
Offset = 2 mV
Buffer with
Adj.value 654 mV
measuring value = 654 mV
measuring value = 652 mV
A0465
Fig. 15: Checking the redox sensor
You can check the sensor by measuring the redox voltage in a
buffer solution
1.
In the "Redox" continuous display press the CAL key
2.
If the ‘measured value’ is stable, press the CAL key
3.
Under ‘Adjust. Value’ enter the specified redox voltage for
the buffer solution (arrow keys)
4.
Press the ENTER key - the buffer value is compared in the
device with the measured value and the ‘Offset’ displayed in
the next menu item. The offset may not be greater than ± 40
mV
5.
Jump back to the continuous display by pressing the ESC
key
ð The menus are then password protected again
Fault message
Cause
Effect
Calibration invalid
Redox voltage difference > 40 mV Replace sensor
Offset too high
6.2.3 Calibrating a temperature sensor
NOTICE!
The temperature sensor of the chlorine sensor need
not be calibrated (this continuous display does not
appear with chlorine sensors).
You should only calibrate the temperature sensor if:
–
–
you are using a type PT100 temperature sensor
you have a precise reference instrument
Do not change the temperature sensor during the cali‐
bration:
–
–
The temperature measured value can only be
adjusted within a range of ± 4 °C about the exworks calibration value
The continuous display ‘Temperature, Cl-Sensor’
does not have a calibration menu
Calibrate sensor
Offset = 1.1
adj. value: 26.7
measuring value = 26.7
measuring value = 25.6
A0466
Fig. 16: Calibrating a temperature sensor
265
Adjustment
To call the calibration menu, proceed as follows:
1.
In the ‘Temperature, Pt1000’ continuous display press the
CAL key
2.
Take a water sample of at least 250 ml
Carry out the measurement immediately after sampling
before the temperature of the water sample changes.
3.
Immerse the external PT100 temperature sensor of the DUL‐
COMARIN® II and that of the reference instrument into the
water sample
4.
Once the ‘measured value’ is stable, press the ENTER key
5.
Under ‘Adjust. Value’ enter the value of the reference instru‐
ment (arrow keys) and press the ENTER key
6.
Jump back to the continuous display by pressing the ESC
key
ð The menus are then password protected again
Fault message
Cause
Effect
Calibration invalid
Temperature difference > 4 °C
Replace sensor
Offset too high
6.2.4 Calibrating a chlorine sensor for free chlorine
NOTICE!
Measurement quality
The condition of a chlorine sensor is decisive for the
quality of the measurement. Therefore each chlorine
sensor must periodically be recalibrated using a DPD
measuring set.
NOTICE!
Further applicable documents
Please also observe the operating instructions for the
sensor and in-line probe housing!
Actuating variable: 24 %
Calibrate sensor
Zero point = 5 pA
slope = 105.22 %
measuring value = 1.16 mg/l
DPD-value: 1.16 mg/l
measuring value = 1.12 mg/l
A0467
Fig. 17: Calibrating a chlorine sensor for free chlorine
To call the calibration menu, proceed as follows:
266
1.
Block the sample water
2.
In the ‘Cl’ continuous display press the CAL key
Adjustment
3.
If the ‘measured value’ is stable, press the CAL key
4.
Immediately afterwards, take a water sample from the flow
gauge
5.
Immediately afterwards, determine the chlorine content of the
sample water with a photometer and a suitable measuring
set, e.g. DPD 1 for free chlorine (CLE sensor)
6.
Enter the determined chlorine content immediately under
‘DPD value’ (arrow keys)
7.
Press the ENTER key
ð - now the new calibration values are displayed.
8.
Press the ESC key to jump back to the continuous display
ð the menus are then password protected again.
9.
If total chlorine is also being measured, then also immedi‐
ately calibrate this measured variable
Repeat the calibration after one day.
10.
Open the stopcocks again for the sample water
Fault message
Cause
Effect
Calibration invalid
Error upon calibration
Old zero point and gradient
remain, recalibrate
6.2.5 Calibrating a chlorine sensor for total chlorine
NOTICE!
Measurement quality
The condition of a chlorine sensor is decisive for the
quality of the measurement. Therefore each chlorine
sensor must periodically be recalibrated using a DPD
measuring set.
NOTICE!
Here you calibrate the CTE sensor for total chlorine.
The DULCOMARIN® II calculates the displayed value
for combined chlorine as the difference between the
measured values for free chlorine and total chlorine
The chlorine sensor for free chlorine must be a CLE
3.1 for differential measurement
267
Adjustment
NOTICE!
Further applicable documents
Please also observe the operating instructions for the
sensor and in-line probe housing!
Calibrate sensor
Zero point = 5 pA
slope = 105.22 %
measuring value = 0.48 mg/l
comb. Cl
Chlore total: 0.45 ppm
DPD-value: 0.48 mg/l
measuring value = 0.45 mg/l
A0468
Fig. 18: Calibrating a chlorine sensor for total chlorine
To call the calibration menu, proceed as follows:
1.
Block the sample water
2.
In the ‘Cl comb’ continuous display press the CAL key
3.
If the ‘measured value’ is stable, press the CAL key
4.
Immediately afterwards, take a water sample from the flow
gauge
5.
Immediately afterwards, determine the chlorine content of the
sample water with a photometer and a suitable measuring
set, e.g. DPD 1 for free chlorine (CLE sensor)
6.
Enter the determined chlorine content immediately under
‘DPD value’ (arrow keys)
7.
Press the ENTER key
ð - now the new calibration values are displayed.
8.
Press the ESC key to jump back to the continuous display
ð the menus are then password protected again.
9.
If total chlorine is also being measured, then also immedi‐
ately calibrate this measured variable
Repeat the calibration after one day.
10.
Open the stopcocks again for the sample water
6.2.6 Chlorine sensor temperature
There is only one continuous display for the chlorine sensor. The
temperature sensor of the chlorine sensor cannot be calibrated, no
calibration menu follows from the continuous display.
268
Assembly and operating instructions
DULCOMARIN® II, N-Module
(Power Supply Module without Relay) DXMaN
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXMa _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 986528
BA DC 073 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986528, 1, en_GB
© 2011
270
Supplemental instructions
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and installation
271
Supplemental instructions
272
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Identity code...................................................................... 274
2
About this device............................................................... 276
2.1 Safety chapter........................................................... 276
2.2 Storage and transport............................................... 276
3
Assembly and installation................................................. 277
3.1 Repairs (fuse change only)....................................... 279
273
Identity code
1
Identity code
The identity code describes the external modules for
the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Only the M module of mounting type ‘W’ ‘Wall
mounting’ can be ordered with operating elements and
with different languages.
DXMa
External modules for the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Module:
M
M module, measuring module: pH, redox, temperature
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog outputs
R
R module, control module: Chlorine gas metering device with feedback 1) 2)
N
N module, power supply module without relay 1) 2)
P
P module, power supply module without relay, only mounting type ‘0)’
I
I module, current input module, 3 mA inputs, 2 digital inputs
2)
Mounting type:
0
Without housing, only P-module (IP 00)
W
Wall mounted (IP 65)
H
Mounting rail (IP 20)
E
Upgrade module (insert module for DXCa, IP 20)
Version:
0
With controls
2
Without controls
3
Without controls (only mounting type ‘E’ )
Application:
0
Standard
S
Swimming pool (only m module)
Language:
00
No controls 2)
DE
German
EN
English
ES
Spanish
FR
French
IT
Italian
Certification:
274
00
No certification, only P-module
without housing
01
CE mark
Identity code
only mounting type W wall mounting / 2) only in version ‘2’
without controls
1)
275
About this device
2
About this device
The N-module DXMaN (power module without relay) supplies the
modules of a DULCOMARIN® II system with electrical power.
2.1 Safety chapter
The DXMaN module must only be used as a power supply for the
DULCOMARIN® II.
The DXMaN module must only be used as part of a
DULCOMARIN® II.
Only trained personnel may install the N module DXMaN.
2.2 Storage and transport
CAUTION!
Protect the module against moisture and the effects of
chemicals, even while still packaged.
Store and transport the module it its original packaging.
Ambient conditions for storage and transportation:
n Temperature: -10 °C ... 70 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
276
Assembly and installation
3
Assembly and installation
NOTICE!
The installation must only be carried out by technically
trained personnel.
When assembling and installing this device, observe
the instructions in the operating instructions "Multichannel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Dis‐
infection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and instal‐
lation".
The central unit does not allocate the N modules any
‘NodeIDs’ . They do not form an active part of the bus
system.
Make the CAN connection according to the "Multi-channel meas‐
uring and control system operating instructions DULCOMARIN® II
Swimming Pool Controller and Disinfection Controller DXCa Part 1,
Assembly and Installation".
WARNING!
Mains voltage
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries.
External fuse necessary.
If mains voltage is connected to the device, then the
fuse carrier is also under mains voltage.
Before working on the device, disconnect the device
from the mains voltage and secure to prevent
switching back on.
277
Assembly and installation
A0478
Fig. 1: Terminal Wiring Diagram
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fuse 5x20 slow-acting
CAN connector plug M12 5 pole.
LED 2
LED 1
5.
6.
✱
Connector for central unit✱
CAN bus connector to the modules✱
If used as an Internet module
Terminal allocation
Description
Terminal identifier
Terminal no.
Pol
Mains
X1
11
N
12
L(1)
The two LEDS (LED 1 and LED 2) indicate the load of
the 24V power supply for the CAN bus.
Flash code LEDs power supply monitoring DULCOMARIN® II (N and P module)
Operating status
LED 1
LED 2
(H2, power)
(H3, power)
Normal
off
Limit load
Overload / short circuit
278
Power
Remarks
green
< 1.1 A
All OK
red
off
> 1.1 A
Insert another
power supply
module into the loop
red, flashing
off
> 1.35 A
Check wiring
Assembly and installation
Power supply module
Locate the power supply module in the CAN bus backbone (DUL‐
COMARIN® II DULCO-Net)
The central unit always contains a power supply module.
Number of pools
Additional N- or P-mod‐
ules
Number of pools
Additional N- or P-mod‐
ules
1
-
9
4
2
-
10
5
3
1
11
5
4
2
12
6
5
2
13
6
6
3
14
7
7
3
15
7
8
4
16
8
(Exception: number of pools = 2)
Electrical data
n Nominal voltage (X1): 90 - 253 V AC (50/60 Hz)
n Maximum power consumption: 500 mA at 90 V AC // 180 mA
at 253 V AC
n Internal fusing with: Micro fuse 5 x 20 mm, 630 mA, 250 V,
slow-acting
The N module DXMaN is a 24 V direct current power supply
module (24 V DC, 1 A). Degree of protection: IP 20 (within the
DXM housing: IP 65)
3.1 Repairs (fuse change only)
WARNING!
Mains voltage
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries.
External fuse necessary.
If mains voltage is connected to the device, then the
fuse carrier is also under mains voltage.
Before working on the device, disconnect the device
from the mains voltage and secure to prevent
switching back on.
NOTICE!
The fuse only may be replaced by technically trained
personnel. All other repair work may only be carried
out by Customer Service.
Otherwise, general safety regulations apply.
Use only original fuses: Micro fuse 5 x 20 mm, 630 mA, 250 V,
slow-acting (Order No. 712030).
279
Assembly and installation
280
Assembly and operating instructions
DULCOMARIN® II, P-Module
(Power Supply Module with Relay) DXMaP
A0479
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXMa _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
Part no. 986903
BA DC 074 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986903, 1, en_GB
© 2011
282
Supplemental instructions
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions and supplementary instructions are
only valid in combination with the following operating and supple‐
mentary instructions:
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and installation
n Multi-channel measuring and control system operating instruc‐
tions DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Disin‐
fection Controller DXCa Part 2: Operation
283
Supplemental instructions
284
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Identity code...................................................................... 286
2
About this device............................................................... 288
2.1 Safety chapter........................................................... 288
2.2 Storage and transport............................................... 288
3
Assembly and installation.................................................
3.1 Repairs (fuse change only).......................................
3.2 Arrangement of LEDs...............................................
3.3 Example for connection of a solenoid valve.............
4
Technical data................................................................... 294
289
291
292
293
285
Identity code
1
Identity code
The identity code describes the external modules for
the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Only the M module of mounting type ‘W’ ‘Wall
mounting’ can be ordered with operating elements and
with different languages.
DXMa
External modules for the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Module:
M
M module, measuring module: pH, redox, temperature
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog outputs
R
R module, control module: Chlorine gas metering device with feedback 1) 2)
N
N module, power supply module without relay 1) 2)
P
P module, power supply module without relay, only mounting type ‘0)’
I
I module, current input module, 3 mA inputs, 2 digital inputs
2)
Mounting type:
0
Without housing, only P-module (IP 00)
W
Wall mounted (IP 65)
H
Mounting rail (IP 20)
E
Upgrade module (insert module for DXCa, IP 20)
Version:
0
With controls
2
Without controls
3
Without controls (only mounting type ‘E’ )
Application:
0
Standard
S
Swimming pool (only m module)
Language:
00
No controls 2)
DE
German
EN
English
ES
Spanish
FR
French
IT
Italian
Certification:
286
00
No certification, only P-module
without housing
01
CE mark
Identity code
only mounting type W wall mounting / 2) only in version ‘2’
without controls
1)
287
About this device
2
About this device
The power supply module with relay DXMaP with alarm relay and
solenoid valve relay supplies the DULCOMARIN® II compact with
mains voltage and allows it to control 3 solenoid valves or hose
pumps via pulse frequency e.g. to:
n
n
n
n
raise / lower the pH value
meter disinfectant
meter flocculant
minimise combined chlorine
The DXMaP power supply module has the following outputs:
n power relay for alarm output
n power relay output for solenoid valve or hose pump (pH correc‐
tion)
n power relay output for solenoid valve or hose pump (disinfec‐
tant)
n power relay output for hose pump (flocculant) or relay output
(minimising of combined chlorine)
n one mains input
2.1 Safety chapter
CAUTION!
Safety when using the P module
–
–
–
The DXMaP power supply module with relay must
only be used to control alarm horns, solenoid
valves and hose pumps as well as to provide the
power supply for the DULCOMARIN® II DXCa.
The DXMaP power supply module with relay must
only be used as part of the DULCOMARIN® II.
The installation must only be carried out by techni‐
cally trained personnel.
2.2 Storage and transport
CAUTION!
Protect the module against moisture and the effects of
chemicals, even while still packaged.
Store and transport the module it its original packaging.
Ambient conditions for storage and transportation:
n Temperature: -10 °C ... 70 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
288
Assembly and installation
3
Assembly and installation
NOTICE!
The installation must only be carried out by technically
trained personnel.
When assembling and installing this device, observe
the instructions in the operating instructions "Multichannel measuring and control system
DULCOMARIN® II Swimming Pool Controller and Dis‐
infection Controller DXCa Part 1: Assembly and instal‐
lation".
Make the CAN connection according to the "Multi-channel meas‐
uring and control system operating instructions DULCOMARIN® II
Swimming Pool Controller and Disinfection Controller DXCa Part 1,
Assembly and Installation".
Terminal allocation
Description
Terminal identifier
Terminal no.
Alarm relay
P1
1
Pol
Function
Alarm horn (control)
2
3
Power relay 1
P2
4
PWM pH-lowerer (control sole‐
noid valve DULCO®flex)
5
Power relay 2
P3
PWM pH-raiser (control)
6
free
7
PWM chlorine
PWM ORP
PWM alkaline
PWM acid
Backwashing
Power relay 3
P4
8
UV system enable
9
PWM chlorine (control)
PWM ORP (control)
Heating enable
Power supply
X1
10
PE
11
N
12
L(1)
289
Assembly and installation
A0480
Fig. 1: Terminal Wiring Diagram
I.
II.
Power relay
Fuse 0.63 A, slow-acting
III.
IV.
Supply Voltage
Alarm (horn)
Locate the power supply module in the CAN bus backbone (DUL‐
COMARIN® II DULCO-Net)
Power supply module
The central unit always contains a power supply module.
Number of pools
Additional N- or P-mod‐
ules
Number of pools
Additional N- or P-mod‐
ules
1
-
9
4
2
-
10
5
3
1
11
5
4
2
12
6
5
2
13
6
6
3
14
7
7
3
15
7
8
4
16
8
(Exception: number of pools = 2)
290
Assembly and installation
The two LEDS (LED 1 and LED 2) indicate the load of
the 24V power supply for the CAN bus.
Flash code LEDs power supply monitoring DULCOMARIN® II (N and P module)
Operating status
LED 1
LED 2
Power
Remarks
(H2, power)
(H3, power)
Normal
off
green
< 1.1 A
All OK
Limit load
red
off
> 1.1 A
Insert another
power supply
module into the loop
Overload / short circuit
red, flashing
off
> 1.35 A
Check wiring
3.1 Repairs (fuse change only)
WARNING!
Mains voltage
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries.
External fuse necessary.
If mains voltage is connected to the device, then the
fuse carrier is also under mains voltage.
Before working on the device, disconnect the device
from the mains voltage and secure to prevent
switching back on.
NOTICE!
The fuse only may be replaced by technically trained
personnel. All other repair work may only be carried
out by Customer Service.
Otherwise, general safety regulations apply.
Use only original fuses: Micro fuse 5 x 20 mm, 630 mA, 250 V,
slow-acting (Order No. 712030).
291
Assembly and installation
3.2 Arrangement of LEDs
A0481
Fig. 2: Arrangement of LEDs
292
Assembly and installation
3.3 Example for connection of a solenoid valve
WARNING!
External fuse necessary
Example for connection of a solenoid valve (or hose pump
DULCO®flex DF2a or alpha motor-driven metering pump).
A0482
Fig. 3: Example for connection of a solenoid valve
I. Fuse 0.63 A, slow-acting
II. Mains connection
293
Technical data
4
Technical data
Electrical data
The DXMaP power supply module with relay contains
the 24 V DC, 1 A direct current power supply unit.
Power relay for alarm output (P1):
n Type of contact: Changeover contact with interference-sup‐
pressed varistors
n Load capacity: 250 V AC, 3 A max., 700 VA
n Contact lifespan: > 105 switching operations (at 3 A)
Power relay output for control variable output or limit value
reporting (P2 - P4):
n Type of contact: N/O contact with varistors, interference-sup‐
pressed
n Load capacity: 250 V AC, 3 A max., 700 VA
n Contact lifespan: > 20 x 106 switching operations
Nominal voltage (X1):
n 90 - 253 V AC (50 / 60 Hz)
n Maximum power consumption: 500 mA at 90 V AC // 180 mA
at 253 V AC
n Internal fusing with: Micro fuse 5 x 20 mm, 630 mA, 250 V,
slow-acting
n Electrical power consumption: 30 W
Degree of protection: IP 20
Ambient conditions: Storage temperature: -10...70 °C
294
Assembly and operating instructions
DULCOMARIN® II, R-Module
(Control Unit for Chlorine Gas Metering Device)
DXMaR
A0448
Please enter the identity code of your device here! DXMA _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
These operating instructions are only valid in conjunction with the "Operating instructions DULCOMARIN® II, Part 1:
Assembly and installation".
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
986539
BA DC 075 02/11 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
986539, 1, en_GB
© 2011
296
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Identity code...................................................................... 298
2
Safety and responsibility................................................... 300
3
Handling the device.......................................................... 301
4
Terminal Wiring Diagram.................................................. 302
297
Identity code
1
Identity code
The identity code describes the external modules for
the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Only the M module of mounting type ‘W’ ‘Wall
mounting’ can be ordered with operating elements and
with different languages.
DXMa
External modules for the DULCOMARIN® II, series DXM
Module:
M
M module, measuring module: pH, redox, temperature
A
A module, control module: 3 pumps and 4 analog outputs
R
R module, control module: Chlorine gas metering device with feedback 1) 2)
N
N module, power supply module without relay 1) 2)
P
P module, power supply module without relay, only mounting type ‘0)’
I
I module, current input module, 3 mA inputs, 2 digital inputs
2)
Mounting type:
0
Without housing, only P-module (IP 00)
W
Wall mounted (IP 65)
H
Mounting rail (IP 20)
E
Upgrade module (insert module for DXCa, IP 20)
Version:
0
With controls
2
Without controls
3
Without controls (only mounting type ‘E’ )
Application:
0
Standard
S
Swimming pool (only m module)
Language:
00
No controls 2)
DE
German
EN
English
ES
Spanish
FR
French
IT
Italian
Certification:
298
00
No certification, only P-module
without housing
01
CE mark
Identity code
only mounting type W wall mounting / 2) only in version ‘2’
without controls
1)
299
Safety and responsibility
2
Safety and responsibility
NOTICE!
Further applicable documents
These operating instructions are only valid in conjunc‐
tion with the "Operating instructions DULCOMARIN® II,
Part 1: Assembly and installation".
All the safety instructions and explanations contained
therein must be observed without exception.
NOTICE!
Correct and proper use
– You many only use the DXMaR R module to con‐
trol a servomotor
– You many only use the DXMaR R module as part
of a DULCOMARIN® II
– Any other uses or module conversions are pro‐
hibited
WARNING!
Danger of malfunctions
Only trained personnel may install the DXMaR R
module. Only then can it be ensured that all compo‐
nents of the control circuit are matched to each other
and operating correctly
300
Handling the device
3
Handling the device
Storage and transport
CAUTION!
Protect the module against moisture and the effects of
chemicals, even while still packaged!
Store and transport the module it its original packaging.
Ambient conditions for storage and transport:
n Temperature: -10 °C ... 70 °C
n Max. permissible relative humidity: 95 %, non-condensing (DIN
IEC 60068-2-30)
Assembly and installation
WARNING!
Danger of malfunctions
Only trained personnel may install the DXMaR R
module. Only then can it be ensured that all compo‐
nents of the control circuit are matched to each other
and operating correctly
NOTICE!
Terminal Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram can be found at the end of these
operating instructions, see Ä Chapter 4 ‘Terminal
Wiring Diagram’ on page 302.
Create the CAN connection in accordance with the ‘Operating
instructions DULCOMARIN ® II, Part 1: Assembly and
installation.’ .
301
Terminal Wiring Diagram
4
Terminal Wiring Diagram
WARNING!
Danger to life due to chlorine gas
Large quantities of chlorine gas can escape if an
uncontrolled chlorine gas metering device is set to
‘ON’ . Chlorine gas can escape into the swimming pool
hall.
Possible consequence: Fatal or very serious injuries
Measure: Lock the power supply to the chlorine gas
metering device to allow for a power failure occurring;
do likewise with the power supplies to the booster
pump and the circulating pump, to ensure these
pumps remain inactive.
Power
relay outputs
Position feedback input
Internal
opened
closed
open
close
External
Supply voltage
A0449
Fig. 1: Terminal Wiring Diagram
302
Terminal Wiring Diagram
Terminal allocation
Description
Terminal identifier
Terminal no.
Pol.
Function
Power relay output
1
P1
1
C
Servomotor shut
2
NO
3
NC
4
C
5
NO
6
NC
7
-
8
S
9
+
Power relay output
2
Response signal
input
Electrical data
P2
XR
Servomotor open
Feedback servomotor
position
Power relay output (P1, P2):
n Type of contact: Changeover contact with interference-sup‐
pressed varistors
n Load capacity: 250 V AC, 3 A max., 700 VA
n Contact lifespan: > 20 x 105 switching operations
Position feedback input: XR
n
n
n
n
n
n
Galvanically isolated from the power relay contacts
Insulation voltage: 500 V
Potentiometer to be connected: 0 Ω ... 1 kΩ
Accuracy (without potentiometer errors): 1 % of input range
Resolution: 0.5 % of input range
Manipulating time: min.: 25 s / max.: 180 s
303
Terminal Wiring Diagram
304
Supplementary instructions
DULCOMARIN® II
Function extension with M, A and P module
Please carefully read these operating instructions before use! · Do not discard!
The operator shall be liable for any damage caused by installation or operating errors!
Technical changes reserved.
985558
Only valid with the complete operating instructions DULCOMARIN® II
BA DC 079 04/12 EN
ProMinent Dosiertechnik GmbH
Im Schuhmachergewann 5 - 11
69123 Heidelberg
Telephone: +49 6221 842-0
Fax: +49 6221 842-419
email: [email protected]
Internet: www.prominent.com
985558, 1, en_GB
© 2012
306
Supplemental instructions
General non-discriminatory approach
In order to make it easier to read, this document uses the male
form in grammatical structures but with an implied neutral sense. It
is aimed equally at both men and women. We kindly ask female
readers for their understanding in this simplification of the text.
Supplementary information
Please read the supplementary information in its entirety.
The following are highlighted separately in the document:
n Enumerated lists
Instructions
ð Outcome of the instructions
Information
This provides important information relating to the cor‐
rect operation of the device or is intended to make
your work easier.
Safety information
The safety information includes detailed descriptions of the haz‐
ardous situation.
307
Supplemental instructions
308
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Function MAP................................................................... 310
2
Circulation quantity allocation........................................... 311
2.1 Specification of the respective circulating operating
conditions.................................................................. 313
3
Flow control [water flow] .................................................. 314
4
Timer settings................................................................... 317
5
Water top-up..................................................................... 319
6
Control of the backwashing valves................................... 320
7
Index................................................................................. 321
309
Function MAP
1
Function MAP
Function extension with M, A and P
module
With the standard modules M, A, and P it is possible to activate the
following additional functions:
n
n
n
n
n
Water level (4) with topping up (5)
Sensor cap (3) with/without paddle switch (2)
Automatic backwashing (1)
Heating control (7)
Gutter cleaning function (6)
6.
7.
5.
1.
2.
4.
3.
A1103
Fig. 1: Function extension with M, A and P module
The following software versions (from and including) must be
installed so that these functions can be activated:
n
n
n
n
310
DXCa 3021
M-Module 3010
A-Module 3010
P-Module 3000
Circulation quantity allocation
2
Circulation quantity allocation
The following circulation operating points are specified under this
menu item.
The setting options in this menu item include:
n Normal mode
n Backwashing
n [ECO min] circulation
For an efficient and ecological operation you must match the data
of the circulating pump to the analog signal.
Configuring module DXMaA
System
1
A
DXMaA
R1 R2 R3 K1 K2 K3 Iout1 Iout2 Iout3 Iout4
Pump terminals
Recorder
R1: Acid pump
Iout1: pH Value
Max . freq.
= 180 Str/min
Iout2 :ORP value
K1 type
NO
Iout3 :free chlorine
R2: ORP pump
Iout4 :ph lower dosing
Max . freq.
= 180 Str/min
K2 type
NO
R3: Flocculant pump
= 180 Str/min
Max . freq.
Capacity=
1,40 l/h
K3 type
NO
Circulation
SERVICE CONFIG
DEFAULT SAVE
A0192
Fig. 2: Configuring module DXMaA (configuration menu)
1.
In the [continuous display] press the [ENTER] key
ð You can now see the [Central menu item].
2.
In the [Central menu item] display press the [F4] [CONFIG]
key
ð The configuration menu is now displayed.
3.
Using the horizontal arrow keys, select the [A] tab and then
press the [ENTER] key
ð You must now enter your password.
4.
Using the arrow keys enter your password and then press
the [ENTER] key
ð The configuration menu for your A module is now dis‐
played.
311
Circulation quantity allocation
Now you must first activate the analog outputs:
–
–
Analog output 2 [Iout2] for circulation 1 (UW1)
Analog output 4 [Iout4] for circulation 2 (UW1)
System
1
DXMaA
R1 R2 R3 K1 K2 K3 Iout1 Iout2 Iout3 Iout4
Pump connectors
recorder
R1: pH lowering pump
Iout1: pH value
max. freq.
= 180 stroke/min
Iout2 : ControlCirculation 1
K1 temp
NO
Iout3 :Chlorine value
R2: chlorine pump
Iout4 : ControlCirculation 2
max. freq.
= 180 stroke/min
K2 Type
NO
R3: flocculant pump
= 180 stroke/min
max. freq.
Capacity=
1.40 l/h
K3 Type
NO
Circ. 2
CONFIG
Circ. 1
SERVICE CONFIG
DEFAULT SAVE
A1129
Fig. 3: Configuring module DXMaA (configuration menu)
5.
If analog output 2 [Iout2] and analog output 4 [Iout4] have not
yet been activated for the circulating pumps, this must be
done now. Move to the analog output [lout] to be set using
the arrow keys and then press the [ENTER] key
ð The adjustment display for the analog output [Iout], which
is to be set, appears.
6.
Using the vertical arrow keys, set the corresponding control
output [lout2] or [lout4] [ControlCirculation] (1 or 2) and then
press the [ENTER]key
ð The configuration menu for your A module is now dis‐
played.
7.
Now press the [F5] key [BACK-UP] and answer the following
query by pressing the [ENTER] key
ð A controller writes the values of the changed parameters
into its control.
8.
Now press the [ENTER] key
ð The configuration menu for your A module is now dis‐
played.
9.
Using the [F3] key now select the circulating pump 1
[Parameter circulation 1] or select circulating pump 2
[Parameter circulation 2] using the [F1] key
ð You can now see the configuration menu of the selected
circulating pump
10.
Select the desired parameters using the arrow keys and then
press the [ENTER] key
Make the following adjustments:
n Range: 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA
n Value 0/4 mA: minimum circulation capacity of the
installed circulating pump 1 or 2 in m3/h
n Value 20 mA: maximum value circulation capacity of the
installed circulating pump 1 or 2 in m3/h
312
Circulation quantity allocation
2.1 Specification of the respective circulating operating conditions
The additional circulating operating conditions:
n Circulation capacity normal operation
– in %, adjustable 0 ... 100 %
n Backwashing circulation capacity
– in %, adjustable 0 ... 100 %
n ECO Mode min circulation capacity
– in %, adjustable 0 ... 100 %
n DIN error ➨ Circulation ➨ 100 %:
– Active / inactive
n [Redox ➨ Circulation (dependency) cor.: inactive]
– Active / inactive
n Circulation reduction =
– in %, adjustable 0 ... 100 %
n Circulation reduction time =
– 0 ... 9999 seconds
CAUTION!
Thermal overloading of the pump motor
Consequence: The pump motor and its surroundings
could be damaged
Measure: Provide the pump motor and/or the fre‐
quency converter with a suitable thermal protection
switch and possibly a fan.
In this respect observe the peculiarities of your local
ambient conditions and your national regulations and
standards.
The operating mode [ECO Mode min. circulation capacity] speci‐
fies how far the circulation capacity of the circulating pumps is
reduced in [ECO Mode].
Operating mode [DIN Error ➨ 100%], immediately sets the circula‐
tion operating mode to [normal mode] if the active ECO limit value
settings are breached. Otherwise the circulation increases in par‐
allel with the values of the reduction mode.
Operating mode [Redox ➨ Circulation (dependency) cor.: active]:
In this operating mode, the reduction rate is influenced by the
actual redox value Start and end redox values are defined. Reduc‐
tion mode is started from the start Redox value. Reduction mode
lowers the circulating pump capacity in steps up until the End
redox value the [ECO Mode min] value is reached. If the water
redox value falls below the start redox value, then the circulation
starts again at 100% capacity.
Operating mode [Redox ➨ Circulation (dependency) cor.: inactive]:
In this operating mode, the reduction rate [Circulation reduction %]
and the time period [Circulation reduction time = seconds ] are set.
This reduction [Step reductions] is continued downwards until the
set value [ECOMode min] is reached.
The operating mode [Circulation reduction in %] in which the time
period in [sec] is set. This reduction [Step reductions] is continued
until the set [ECO Mode min] value is reached.
313
Flow control [water flow]
3
Flow control [water flow]
NOTICE!
Alarm during logical checking
Cause: Alarm during logical checking.
Fault: The flow control reports that a water flow exists,
although the circulating pump is off.
Measure: The controller triggers an alarm. The flow
control must be checked.
NOTICE!
No flow
Cause: No flow in the water circulation system.
Fault: There is for example no water in the system or a
ball valve is closed.
The controller switches the circulating pump off and
triggers an alarm.
Timer adjustments with two circulating pumps
If two circulating pumps are connected, then they must
always be started simultaneously via the time. A
delayed switching on of the pumps, resulting in
switching on at different times, is not permitted
because this leads to an error message at the control
so that consequently the second circulating pump does
not start.
Example: Both circulating pumps are stopped by the
timer. The pool has status [Stop] and consequently the
paddle switch signals are not evaluated by the con‐
troller. If the timer now starts Circulating pump 1, then
within 30 seconds paddle switch [1] must deliver feed‐
back relating to the water flow. The paddle switch [2]
delivers the signal [no water flow] (which is indeed cor‐
rect), but the control reports the error [No flow]. Hence
the circulating pump [2] cannot be automatically
started by the timer.
Remedy: Adjust the timer so that both circulating
pumps are started simultaneously. This prevents one
of the two circulating pumps from not starting.
The flow control [Water flow] monitors the circulating pump flow.
The [Flow Control] is used with a paddle switch or a thermo switch.
The [Water flow] flow control should prevent running dry of the
system or delivery from the circulating pump against a closed gate
valve. If the [water flow] flow control is activated in the A module,
then a closed [NC] contact is necessary, to make possible contin‐
uous operation of the circulation.
The two core cable of the flow checking device (paddle switch or
thermo switch) must be connected in the A-module to the [R2] ter‐
minal. If the contact remains set on [passive] during circulating
pump control, then the circulating pump is stopped after a delay
period and the control produces an error message. This error mes‐
sage can only be deleted in manual operating mode.
314
Flow control [water flow]
System
1
DXMaA
R1 R2 R3 K1 K2 K3 Iout1 Iout2 Iout3 Iout4
Pump connectors
recorder
R1: free
Iout1: pH value
K1: Liquid level
Iout2 : ControlCirculation 1
K1 Type:NC
Iout3 :Chlorine value
Time: 30 s
Iout4 : ControlCirculation 2
free
R2:
K2 Water_flow_1
K2 Type: NC
R3: free
K3 Water_flow_2
K3 Type NC
Circ. 2
CONFIG
Circ. 1
SERVICE CONFIG
DEFAULT SAVE
A1130
Fig. 4: R1, R2 and R3 to [free] and K1 type, K2 type and K3 type to
[NC]
Necessary parameters of the terminals and relays
Relay
Terminal
Terminal type
K1 type
NC
K2 type
NC
K3 type
NC
R1
free
K1
R2
free
K2
R3
free
K3
Water_flow_1
System
1
A
DXMaA
R1 R2 R3 K1 K2 K3 Iout1 Iout2 Iout3 Iout4
Pump terminals
Recorder
R1: Acid pump
Iout1: pH Value
Max . freq.
= 180 Str/min
Iout2 :ORP value
K1 type
NO
Iout3 :free chlorine
R2: ORP pump
Iout4 :ph lower dosing
Max . freq.
= 180 Str/min
K2 type
NO
R3: Flocculant pump
= 180 Str/min
Max . freq.
Capacity=
1,40 l/h
K3 type
NO
Circulation
SERVICE CONFIG
DEFAULT SAVE
A0192
Fig. 5: Configuring module DXMaA
1.
In the [continuous display] press the [ENTER] key
ð You can now see the [Central menu item].
2.
In the [Central menu item] display press the [F4] [CONFIG]
key
ð The configuration menu is now displayed.
3.
Using the horizontal arrow keys, select the [A] tab and then
press the [ENTER] key
ð You must now enter your password.
315
Flow control [water flow]
4.
Using the arrow keys enter your password and then press
the [ENTER] key
ð The configuration menu for your A module is now dis‐
played.
5.
Select the desired parameters to be changed using the arrow
keys and then press the [ENTER] key
ð The adjustment display for the parameter to be set
appears.
6.
Using the vertical arrow keys enter the corresponding value
and then press the [ENTER] key
ð The configuration menu for your A module is now dis‐
played.
7.
Now press the [F5] key [BACK-UP] and answer the following
query by pressing the [ENTER] key
ð A controller writes the values of the changed parameters
into its control.
8.
Now press the [ENTER] key
ð The configuration menu for your A module is now dis‐
played.
9.
316
Repeat this process for all parameters that are to be
changed.
Timer settings
4
Timer settings
Cause: Timer setting, this means the circulation is only
active if the operator activates this circulation for
bathing/swimming operation.
The operating status of your overall system can
change at any time during the automatic operation of
the controller. In this respect for example, the circu‐
lating pump, heating etc., can start or stop at any time.
The functions and operating times, circulation and backwashing
can be set at any time using via the timer setting.
In operating mode [Actuator module] under [Options], in operating
mode [Circulation] the various timer adjustments can be made by
activating circulation.
When setting the timer, you must check that you save
the settings after each timer adjustment. If timers 1 ...
6 are set and then saved, then only timer 6 is saved.
There are 12 timer functions available for a pool circuit:
n Timer 1 ... 6 when using Circulation 1
n Timer 7 ... 12 when using Circulation 2
Timer configuration
Timer adjustments with two circulating pumps
If two circulating pumps are connected, then they must
always be started simultaneously via the time. A
delayed switching on of the pumps, resulting in
switching on at different times, is not permitted
because this leads to an error message at the control
so that consequently the second circulating pump does
not start.
Example: Both circulating pumps are stopped by the
timer. The pool has status [Stop] and consequently the
paddle switch signals are not evaluated by the con‐
troller. If the timer now starts Circulating pump 1, then
within 30 seconds paddle switch [1] must deliver feed‐
back relating to the water flow. The paddle switch [2]
delivers the signal [no water flow] (which is indeed cor‐
rect), but the control reports the error [No flow]. Hence
the circulating pump [2] cannot be automatically
started by the timer.
Remedy: Adjust the timer so that both circulating
pumps are started simultaneously. This prevents one
of the two circulating pumps from not starting.
1.
In the [continuous display] press the [ENTER] key
ð You can now see the [Central menu item].
2.
In the [Central menu item] display press the [F4] [CONFIG]
key
ð The configuration menu is now displayed.
3.
Using the horizontal arrow keys, select the [A] tab and then
press the [F2] key [OPTION]
ð You must now enter your password.
317
Timer settings
4.
Using the arrow keys enter your password and then press
the [ENTER] key
ð You can now see the configuration menu of the A module
[OPTION]
5.
Select the desired file card [Circ.] using the horizontal arrow
keys and then press the [ENTER] key
ð You can now see the file card [Circ.]
Circ.
Timer
Interval :
Timer type :
Start time :
Reduction time :
Backwash time :
Mo.
Backwash 1
2 : 00 s
0s
120 s=2min
INFO
Timer 1 - 6 for : Circ 1 and Backwash 1
Timer 1 - 12 for : Circ 2 and Backwash 2
CLEAR
SAVE
Fig. 6: A1105
A1105
6.
Using the horizontal arrow keys, you can now select the
desired timer (1 ... 12)
7.
Using the vertical arrow keys, you can now select the desired
parameters dependent on the selected [Timer Type] and
select with the [- key]:
n [Interval]l
– Each weekday
– free
– Mo. - Fr.
– Sa. - Su.
– Mo. - Su.
n [Timer type]
– free
– Circulation 1 or 2
– Backwashing 1 or 2
n [Start time]
– 0 ... 24
n [Stop time]
– 0 ... 24
n [Reduction time]
– 0 ... 50
n [Backwashing time]
– 0 ... 480 seconds in a total of 33 steps
318
8.
Using the [F4] [Delete] key your can delete all entries
[Status = free] or using the [F5] [Save] key you can save the
entries in the controller Save = [Record parameters!!!]
9.
Using the [ESC] key you can now jump back into the menu
display up to the [Continuous display]
Water top-up
5
Water top-up
An automatic water top-up can be carried out in the skimmer or
surge water tank using a level contact.
Please note that the drinking water connection may not be con‐
nected to the pool circuit. See the corresponding DVGW (German
Gas and Water Association) or FIGAWA (German Federal Associ‐
ation of Gas and Water Companies) regulations or your own
national regulations.
1.
Connect the single-stage level switch in the A module to ter‐
minal [K1 7/8]
2.
In configuration on the A module set terminal [R1] to ‘free’
3.
Thereafter terminal [K1] can be activated as a water level
4.
If the [TIME] [water level] is set to [0 s], then after
10 seconds constantly at the minimum level, the
Level evaluation unit reacts by opening the water
supply solenoid valve. After 10 seconds con‐
stantly at the maximum liquid level, the solenoid
valve for the water supply is closed. If a [TIME]
[water level] of for example [30 s] is set, then for
this 30 seconds water continues to be supplied,
so that the maximum liquid level is reached after
this time.
The [TIME] [water level] can be set from 0 ... 480 seconds in
steps
5.
To actuate a solenoid valve with 230 V, it is necessary to
connect this solenoid valve to the PCB of the P module on
terminal 2 (with one circulation) or terminal 1 (with two circu‐
lations)
6.
Program the configuration menu of this relay using the func‐
tion [Water top-up]
ð
If water is topped up for longer than 180
minutes the controller enters fault mode and
stops the topping up.
This this function is active
7.
If the control time has elapsed and the controller is in fault
mode, then you must press the [F3] key for [Reset] in the A
module configuration menu under service [F2]. This restarts
water top-up in operating mode [AUTO]
319
Control of the backwashing valves
6
Control of the backwashing valves
NOTICE!
The default state of the backwashing valves is deener‐
gised (voltage free)
Fault: No backwashing is possible if the backwashing
valves cannot be controlled.
Consequence: The hygiene parameters worsen and
the hydraulic resistance of the filter increases.
Measure: Regularly check (dependent on the applica‐
tion) the operation of filter backwash.
An automatic 6-way valve cannot be used.
For backwashing there is, for example, the option of controlling a
Besgo® rod valve.
To do this, the rod valve must be connected to terminal P3 in the P
module. If two circuits are in operation, the second rod valve must
be connected to terminal P2.
To activate this function, the function [Backwash 1] or
[Backwash 2] must be activated in the P module.
Setting of the backwashing times is described under Timer set‐
tingÄ Chapter 4 ‘Timer settings’ on page 317.
n
n
n
n
n
320
Which day or which sequence
Which backwashing, 1 or 2
Start time
Reduction time
Duration of the backwashing backwash time
Index
7
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
6-way valve........................................................
A
Automatic water top-up......................................
B
Backwashing parameters...................................
F
Filter back-pressure increasing..........................
G
General non-discriminatory approach................
H
Hygiene parameters worsening.........................
N
non-discriminatory approach..............................
O
Operating status for your complete system........
Q
Question: From which software version is
MAP possible?...................................................
Question: What causes or effects does incor‐
rect backwashing have?.....................................
320
319
320
320
307
320
307
317
Question: What functions does MAP give me?..
Question: What is the purpose of flow control?.
Question: What setting options do I have with
circulation quantity allocation?...........................
Question: What settings can I make at the
timer?.................................................................
Question: Which parameters can I influence
with the circulation operating conditions?..........
Question: Which parameters of the terminals
and relays are necessary for flow control..........
S
Setting the backwashing times..........................
Skimmer.............................................................
Software versions...............................................
Surge water tank................................................
T
Thermal overloading of the pump motor............
Timer configuration............................................
310
314
311
317
313
315
320
319
310
319
313
317
310
320
321
Index
322